JP2016209170A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for allowing a player to have expectations and enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes first variable ball entry means and second variable ball entry means. The game machine includes: first distribution means for at least distributing game balls to the first variable ball entry means, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means; and second distribution means for at least distributing the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means by the first distribution means to the second variable ball entry means, and a downstream side of the second variable ball entry means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, a special symbol winning lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is a big hit, There is a game in which a game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening provided on the board. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed in which two large winning holes are provided on the gaming board surface.

JP 2003-265765 A

  However, in the above-described gaming machines, there has been a demand for improving the interest of games.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a game ball is determined based on a condition determination unit that determines whether a specific condition is satisfied, and that the specific condition is determined by the condition determination unit. A first variable entry means that can be changed from a closed state in which entry is difficult to an open state in which a game ball can enter, and a second variable entry means disposed downstream of the first variable entry means, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, it is determined that a privilege grant means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player and the establishment of the specific condition. Based on the above, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for varying the first variable entry ball means and the second variable entry ball means in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is established in the opened state. The first variable pitching means and the first possible First distribution means for distributing at least game balls to the downstream side of the ball entry means, and game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means by the first distribution means for the second variable ball entry means And second distribution means for distributing at least to the downstream side of the second variable entry means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first distribution means and the second distribution means are arranged in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction. Each has at least a pivotable pivot section and a regulating means for regulating the pivot range of the pivot section at a predetermined angle.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are alternately arranged in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. It is configured to be rotated.

  A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the first variable pitching means is in a closed state, the gaming ball is guided to the second variable pitching means. And when the second variable ball entry means is in a closed state when the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guide means, the guided game ball is distributed to the second distribution ball. It has a guide path for guiding to the means.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the condition determining means for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, and the closing that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter based on the fact that the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means A first variable entry means that can be changed from an open state to a state in which a game ball can enter, a second variable entry means disposed downstream of the first variable entry means, and the first variable entry. On the basis of the fact that a game ball has entered the ball means or the second variable entry means, a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player, and the establishment of the specific condition is determined, A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for varying the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is established in the open state; and Variable ball entry means and downstream side of the first variable ball entry means First distribution means for distributing game balls at least, and game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable entry means by the first distribution means, the second variable entry means, and the second variable entry ball. And a second sorting unit that sorts at least to the downstream side of the unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the privilege game execution means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state and the second advantage game. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the advantageous states can be set, and when the third privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, The specific state is set after the execution of the 3 bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the game balls flowing down. Therefore, there is an effect that a more appropriate sorting operation can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, when the first variable pitching means is in a closed state, the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable pitching means, and the gaming ball is moved to the second variable pitching means by the guiding means. And when the second variable entry means is in a closed state, the guidance means guides the guided game ball to the second distribution means. Features. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, (b) is a case where the jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment and the jackpot type is selected It is the schematic diagram which showed the game state which transfers to. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability change game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability change game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the frame button in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the selection switch in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, c) is a diagram schematically showing a second per-random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the common figure fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment, (b) is MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the notification lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the normal play state or the latent probability change play state displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the latent probability variation game state or probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of front of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment typically, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the common figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the small hitting type selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the special electric accessory operation | movement table set to ROM. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transition of the gaming state in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transition of the gaming state in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the enlarged view to which a part of game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 2nd embodiment was expanded.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and start ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the selection switch 600 is a decision switch (a) for determining the selection of effects, the left switch 600b for instructing selection in the left direction, and for instructing selection in the upward direction. The upper switch 600c includes a right switch 600d for instructing selection in the right direction and a lower switch 600e for instructing selection in the lower direction.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 Start opening 63b, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12. The first start port 630, the right first start port 631, the second start port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67b. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured in the same shape, and are configured as a start port having a gate-type sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. Yes. When a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is the same as the first normal symbol start port 67a. The second normal symbol starting port 67b is held up to four times in total. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol start port 67 (the first normal symbol start port 67b or the second normal symbol start port 67b) remains, the following A normal symbol lottery is performed, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is activated. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 includes a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are spaced apart so that one game ball can pass left and right. In normal times, it is maintained in an upright position. From the state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b stand substantially vertically (in this embodiment, the left guide member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guide member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise). The game ball enters the second start port 640 by moving (that is, changing to the open state), and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member guide the game ball to the second start port 640. Easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not actuated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have been awarded to the first start port 630, the right start port 631, the second start port 640, the first normal symbol start port (through gate) 67a, and the second normal symbol start port (through gate) 67b. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) for which variation display is not executed, is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) based on the winning at the first start port 630 or the right start port 631 is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in this embodiment, 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on winning in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631. After the center segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed.

  On the right 7-segment LED, a second special symbol indicating the result of lottery (second lottery game) determination (lottery) based on winning at the second start port 640 is displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, it is displayed until the variation time determined based on the winning at the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  The first special symbol indicating the determination result (lottery) of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination result (lottery) of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. (See). Thereby, since the 3rd symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display 37b, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) is also applicable.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, is a big hit? In addition to determining whether or not to win (hit a lottery), the jackpot type is also determined. The jackpot type determined here is the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1): jackpot A (15R jackpot probable jackpot), jackpot B (15R regular jackpot), jackpot E (15R regular jackpot (electric support) Yes)) is set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of electric support of jackpot E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to a special state (open state). In jackpot E, after 15 rounds of jackpot game, the electric support state is set until the total number of first lottery games and second lottery games reaches 100.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is arranged as a winning device that is operated in an open state during the big hit game. The variable winning device 65 is operated so as to be released for the jackpots A to E until the first specific winning opening 65a is entered 15 times for a predetermined period or a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls. .

  With reference to FIGS. 4-6, the structure of this variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the variable winning device 65 is A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d that is disposed, the back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d are provided. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first starting port 631 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 640 while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and to the left-handed immediately after the big hit game The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special outlet 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special outlet 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the gaming state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first specific winning port 65a during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can do. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. . The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Has been. Further, when the big hit B and the big hit E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  With reference to FIG. 6B, the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning ball is won in the 14th round in a state where the game balls won before the 14th round are not discharged and the winning ball B is awarded to the probability variation switch 65e3.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball (in this embodiment, one ball win) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a flow in which various game states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type that occurs for each special symbol and a gaming state that shifts after the jackpot occurs in various gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four gaming states are set as the gaming state. The first is a normal gaming state ST1 in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is low (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). The first is a gaming state where the special symbol jackpot probability is low (normal) as in the normal gaming state ST1, but there is electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)). Short-time gaming state ST1h. Third, there is a high probability that the special symbol jackpot is high, and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). (Hidden probability change game state) ST2. The fourth is a game state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is high, and there is electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)). Certain probable electric support game state (so-called probabilistic game state) ST3.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation can be executed simultaneously. However, each game state is configured such that one of the special symbols is substantially changed (also referred to as a subject of substantial change). Specifically, it is configured such that the variation time of the special symbol that is not the subject of substantial variation is longer than the variation time of the special symbol that is the subject of substantial variation. In addition, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is not subject to substantial variation, or a gaming ball enters the starting port for performing a lottery of a special symbol that is subject to substantial variation. It is configured to be in a gaming state that is easy to play. As a result, it is possible to substantially generate the jackpot of the special symbol that is not subject to substantial variation (to make it difficult to generate) and to substantially generate the jackpot of the special symbol that is subject to substantial variation (to make it easier to generate).

  In addition, the method which makes any one special symbol the object of substantial variation is not restricted to the method mentioned above. For example, a normal electric accessory is provided at each of a start opening serving as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol and a start opening serving as a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. Then, in each gaming state, it is conceivable to move (or easily) only the ordinary electric accessory at the start port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed. As a result, the game ball enters the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is the subject of substantial variation, and the gaming ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is not the subject of substantial variation (it is difficult to enter). Can be. In this case, a lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each start port may be performed separately. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary electric accessory is performed based on a ball entering (passing) the first ordinary symbol start opening (referred to as a first ordinary symbol lottery), and the other ordinary electric accessory is movable. The lottery may be performed by entering (passing) the second normal symbol start opening (referred to as a second normal symbol lottery). Further, the lottery of the first normal symbol and the lottery of the second normal symbol may be executable simultaneously, and when the lottery of one normal symbol becomes a big hit, as in the case of the special symbol lottery in the present embodiment. The other normal symbol lottery may be excluded. Thereby, the variation of a game state can be increased and the interest of a player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot that allows the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is different between the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol. That is, the probabilities of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) are different. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of transition (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or short-time gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). In the following, for explaining the flow of setting various gaming states, for the sake of convenience, a jackpot that allows transition to a high-probability gaming state (a gaming ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3) has been selected (occurred). In this case, description will be made on the assumption that the game state shifts to the high probability gaming state (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

  In each gaming state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether a transition to a high probability gaming state (loop) or a transition to a low probability state (falling) is easy by setting a special symbol that is a substantial variation target. As a result, in each gaming state, in addition to two types (high probability, low probability) of probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot, two types (probability) of transition (loop) to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot (probability) It is possible to set a state of high probability and low probability of transition to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, the variation of a game state can be increased and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the probability variation gaming state ST3 that is a high-probability gaming state, by setting the real variation target in FIG. 1, a gaming state that is likely to shift (fall) to a low-probability state, which is also a high-probability gaming state. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, by setting the substantial change target in FIG. 2, it becomes possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. In other words, even if it is the same high-probability gaming state (or low-probability state), by changing the special symbol that is subject to substantial change, it is possible to change the distribution of the gaming state that transitions after the jackpot game, Variations in the transition of the gaming state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. First, in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (a state where the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal gaming state ST1 is set. In the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a subject of substantial variation. That is, the gaming state has a low probability (34%) of occurrence of a jackpot to shift to the high probability gaming state (34% probability). Specifically, a variation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (see FIG. 17). Then, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the high probability gaming state is selected with a probability of 34% as a jackpot type, and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) that remains in the low probability state Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIGS. 7B and 16).

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) that is not the subject of substantial variation is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the determination (lottery) is out of place, 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the variation time in FIG. 2 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the lottery of 2160 to 8200 times can be executed for the first special symbol while the variation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, in the case of a normal game, the jackpot is hit with the first special symbol before the losing second special symbol ends once. Is configured to occur. In addition, since the business hours of the amusement shop are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 at night, they are set longer than that. Therefore, even if the second lottery game is executed in the normal game state ST1, the deviation fluctuation in FIG. 2 does not end within business hours. By configuring in this way, in the normal gaming state ST1, a big hit of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) that is the subject of substantial variation occurs (is easy to do).

  If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the determination of success / failure is not disapproved, and the winning time is a win, 60000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of FIG. 2 (see FIG. 17). This will be described in detail later, but if the variation based on the jackpot is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation based on the other special symbol will be off. It is because it is controlled to become. If the determination result of special figure 2 is a win and if 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of special figure 2 does not end within business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that control is performed such that all fluctuations (first lottery game) executed during business hours are out of place (not a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of Special Figure 2 is defined as the time (10 minutes) that can be finished within business hours. Thereby, the problem mentioned above can be solved.

  However, when the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can determine the result of the special figure 2 for a short time. There is a risk of the action being performed. For example, a game ball is made to enter the second starting port 640 and it is determined that the result of the determination of the special figure 2 based on the incoming ball is wrong (the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is executed for longer than 0.5 seconds). ), There is a risk that an illegal act of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 (so-called reset goto) may be performed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal gaming state ST1 is set, and the variation of each special symbol is initialized (that is, the variation is stopped). ) Therefore, by repeating the fraud (reset goto), it is possible to generate a jackpot based on FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes so that the player cannot determine the result of the special decision (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the fraudulent act (reset goto), and therefore the frequency of execution of the fraudulent act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the jackpot of the special figure 2 by the illegal act (reset goto).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to the above-described one, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery game cannot be executed unless the game ball is intentionally fired (for example, right-handed game), the player performs a right-handed game in the normal gaming state ST1 (performs the second lottery game). As a penalty, the variation time based on the jackpot of FIG. 2 may be set to a time (for example, 1 hour) longer than 600000 ms (10 minutes). Further, in this case, it may be notified that the cheating (right-handed game in the normal gaming state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

  In the pachinko machine 10, the second start port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to enter the game ball into the second starting port 640 (perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game (right-handed game) that passes the right side of the variable display unit 80. In the normal gaming state ST1, the electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is configured not to be set to a special state (open state) (that is, it is difficult to enter the right first starting port 631). Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to FIG. 1 that is a subject of substantial variation, and the second lottery game according to FIG. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous for the player than playing the game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball through the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player will perform a left-handed game. When a left-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second start port 640 and the game ball enters the first start port 630. As a result, a gaming state in which the jackpot of the second special symbol does not occur (is difficult) and the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs (is easy to do) (that is, a gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the high probability gaming state). Can do.

  In the normal gaming state ST1, a big hit B occurs, and after the big hit B big hit game is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (shifted to). On the other hand, after the jackpot A is generated and the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7B). However, if the game ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

  The latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set 10 times higher than the normal gaming state ST1 (to a high probability gaming state), and the second special symbol is a gaming state that is a substantial variation target. That is, the gaming state has a high probability (probability change rate) that a jackpot capable of continuing the high probability gaming state is generated. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thereby, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed by performing the right-handed game. Then, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, as a jackpot type, jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot transferred to the probability variation gaming state ST3 D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a probability of 34%.

  On the other hand, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol that is not a substantial variation target is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol determination (lottery) is out of the range, 180000 ms (30 minutes) is selected as the variation time (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery of a maximum of 3600 times in the second special symbol while the first special symbol is deviated once. Since the jackpot probability during probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, if the game is a normal game, the second special symbol will be a jackpot before the first special symbol that has been missed changes once It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol is a win, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time (see FIG. 18A). In the latent probability changing game state ST2, if the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, and thus the above-described fraud (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thereby, even if a big win occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of continuing the game without reducing the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about 3 game balls can enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry to the specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small hit game. As a result, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in an advantageous state (a state where consumption of the holding ball is suppressed) compared to the normal game state ST1.

  In the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the second special symbol is a jackpot, and when the jackpot D (15R probability varying jackpot) is selected, the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 is set again (loop). On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, a gaming state with probability transformation support (probability gaming state ST3) is set thereafter.

  The probability variation gaming state ST3 is a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a special symbol is set 10 times higher (set to a high probability gaming state), and the first special symbol is a gaming state that is a substantial variation target. Further, the lottery probability of the normal symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also easily selected (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (opening time) during which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set longer than the normal game state ST1 and the latent probability changing game state ST2. Therefore, when the player strikes right, the right first start port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting port 640, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probable gaming state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls will win the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls play as winning balls. Paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease of the player's ball.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in the probability variation game state ST3, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that it becomes too advantageous with respect to a player in the probability variation game state ST3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball may be allowed to enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). Thereby, the privilege with respect to a player can be increased and the interest of a player can be improved.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol that is not the subject of substantial variation is set to be long, and the variation time of the first special symbol that is the subject of substantial variation is set to be short. Specifically, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result (lottery) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is selected to be 1800000 ms (30 minutes) when the result of the determination (lottery) is off (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery of a maximum of 3600 times for the first special symbol while the deviation variation of the second special symbol is performed once. The jackpot probability during probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, so if it is a normal game, the first special symbol will be a big hit before the second special symbol that has been missed changes once It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol determination (lottery) is a win, 5000 ms (5 seconds) is selected as the variation time (see FIG. 18B). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, and thus cannot perform the above-described fraud (reset goto). Therefore, when the big special game is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time is set to 5000 ms (5 seconds). Thereby, even when a big win occurs in the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of continuing the game without reducing the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, 95% of the launched gaming balls win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 640 and the second lottery game is difficult to execute, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a jackpot of the second special symbol that is not a subject of substantial variation.

  When the first special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the big hit A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot A, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (shifted to). Therefore, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is selected (shifted to) with a probability of 34%, and it becomes possible to play a game with a high probability until a win of at least two jackpots is won again. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called falling) after the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set, it is possible to increase the probability that is advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice in a state where consumption of the holding ball is suppressed. Two lottery games (or first lottery games) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can execute two jackpot games in a short period of time compared with the normal gaming state, and there is an effect that a superiority can be provided to the player.

  Further, by displaying the fact that the lottery game is executed with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice, the player can receive at least two jackpots for the player. There is an effect that it can feel assured and can provide a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, when the big special bonus B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). In other words, two big hits cannot be obtained. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, as described above, a right-handed game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol that changes for a long time. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily) (substantially not the jackpot of the first special symbol). However, there may be a big hit of the first special symbol due to the holding ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability changing game state ST2. For example, in the case of a big win in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (probability of 1/40). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% ( (Refer FIG.7 (b) and FIG.16 (b)). If the jackpot A is selected, the game proceeds to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 which is a high probability gaming state, so that two jackpots can be obtained. On the other hand, when jackpot E is selected, two jackpots cannot be obtained, and a transition is made to a low probability state. In this case, 100 short-time games are awarded after the jackpot game ends. Thereby, it is comprised so that a state more advantageous to a player may be provided rather than normal game state ST1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged and the willingness to play is significantly reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) as a trigger for the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640. , A third symbol display device 81 is provided which is configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. Left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) or the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm Three symbol rows in (right display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol displayed in the first display area (Dm) (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) is determined and displayed according to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability gaming state) and the gaming state with probability transformation support (probability gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probability transformation support is provided. When the gaming state is none (latency probability changing gaming state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol type displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may be always displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  Note that the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  A second display area Dn and a second sub display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) is displayed. In the second sub display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (which varies depending on the gaming state) displayed in the second display region Dn is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the case of the probability variation gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the treasure box symbol is displayed in the second display area as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. Dn is displayed. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is performed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately repeated with a short cycle (for example, 1 second). . Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a win, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG.

  A third display area Du is formed at the upper left of the first display area Dm. In the third display area Du, two types of symbol rows “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel, and the symbol on the left is the first special symbol lottery. A result is shown and it is comprised so that the symbol on the right side may show the lottery result of a 2nd special symbol. In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may make it show the lottery result of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol by another aspect. For example, when two types of symbol rows “○” and “×” are displayed in parallel and two “○” symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game) You may comprise so that it may alert | report that it was a win. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, two types of symbol rows “O” and “×” are displayed in parallel in the second display area, and in the probability changing gaming state ST3, FIGS. ) As shown in FIG. 3, the treasure box symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the switching of the gaming state after the big hit game. Thereby, since the display area of the 1st display area Dm can be enlarged, the production effect of the effect displayed on the 1st display area Dm can be heightened. Moreover, when the fluctuation | variation based on a 2nd special symbol is not performed (when there is no suspension of special figure 2), you may make it not display the 2nd display area Dn and the 2nd sub display area Dt. Thereby, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

  Furthermore, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol can be performed simultaneously. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol in the change is also forced It is configured so as to be stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates detachment.

  Here, in the big hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed 15 times (referred to as 15 rounds), whereas in the small win, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed. It is executed twice (for example, two rounds). Further, one round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about 3 game balls can enter. In addition, one round of the small hit game in the probability variation game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the probability variation game state ST3, it is almost impossible to allow the variable winning device 65 to enter the game ball, and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball.

  Even in the probable gaming state ST3, as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating the small hit, the changing second special symbol is forcibly removed (FIG. 9). (See (a)). In this case, after the extra fluctuation of the second special symbol that is not subject to substantial fluctuation, which is a fluctuation for a long time (10 minutes), is stopped and the small hit game of special figure 1 ends, At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, there is a possibility that a jackpot based on the second special symbol occurs. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made in the second lottery game with the second special symbol, the big hit C (15R probability variable big hit) that can be shifted to the high probability gaming state is always selected (100%). It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the change starts based on a new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the second special display area Dn has the first special display. The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. . Note that the mode of change is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn in which the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged, and the first display in which the variation of the first special symbol is displayed. The area Dm may be reduced.

  When the first display area Dm is changed so that the variation of the second special symbol is displayed, a display mode in which the treasure box is opened is executed, and when the result of the determination is wrong, as shown in FIG. "Sorry" is displayed from the treasure box, and the player is informed that the lottery result has been missed. On the other hand, if the determination result is a win, as shown in FIG. 10B, the word “congratulations” is displayed from the treasure box, and the player is shown that the lottery result is a win. The

  As described above, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the first special symbol is won in the small hit, the variation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the variation of the new second special symbol is started. The chance that 2 lottery games are executed can be increased. Further, in that case, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the fluctuation based on the second special symbol is highlighted and displayed, so the player is expected to win a big hit with the second special symbol. Can be made.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, a second sub display area Dt is formed below the second display area Dn. In the second sub display area Dt, as shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol “black triangle mark” corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, a maximum of four reserved symbols “black circles” are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. In the second sub display area Dt, a maximum of four reserved symbols “black triangles” are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as a “black circle”, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is distinguished as a “black triangle”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Furthermore, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the variation starts from the left side of the display area. You may display so that a pending | holding symbol may line up in order.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and corresponding start-ups are performed. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that the lottery results can be displayed at the same time.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is provided. Turn on. The first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path through which the game balls entered are guided to the first start port switch. The main control device 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640 are also one of the winning ports from which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball is won.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, when a variation in which the determination result is a big hit is started in one special symbol, the special symbol that starts to vary after the other symbol is forcibly changed as a lottery result. Is configured to start. Thereby, the malfunction that a jackpot game is started continuously or a jackpot game is started simultaneously can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed with one special symbol, the other lottery game is forcibly executed on the other side. You may comprise so that the lottery game as a lottery result may be performed and a jackpot game may be started continuously. In addition, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted in the other special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation display is continued after the big hit. Also good. In this case, during interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  Further, a special symbol that preferentially executes the variable display in each gaming state may be defined, and the variable symbol display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol change is preferentially executed. In this case, the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcedly stopped) based on the start of execution of the first special symbol variation. As a result, if the first special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol can be changed. However, when the first special symbol starts to change, the second special symbol changes temporarily (or Forced stop). Therefore, the change of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal gaming state ST1.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About configuration>
With reference to FIG. 2, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be further described in detail. In the present embodiment, a left channel PA1 in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right channel PA2 in which the right side of the variable display unit 80 flows down are formed. A first start port 630 is disposed below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are configured such that 85% of the game balls flowing down enter the second starting port 640 by the nail groups T2 and T3. Therefore, the first starting port 630 is configured such that the game ball flowing down the left channel PA1 is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the right channel PA2.

  A first normal symbol start port 67a is disposed in the right flow path PA2, a variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first normal symbol start port 67a, and a right first start port 631 is disposed below the first normal symbol start port 67a. A symbol start port 67b is arranged. A second start port 640 is disposed below the right first start port 631. The game board 13 is provided with a plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball.

  The game ball fired in the right channel is the right-hand side in the normal state (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b stand up) by the nail group T4 (consisting of three nails). It is configured so that a game ball does not enter one start port 631. When the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel are configured to flow down the left side of the right first start port 631. Note that the proportion of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (tilt) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable prize winning device 65 side (opposite side to the nail group T4), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 is widened and flows down between the nail T1 and the nail group T4. That is, the rate at which game balls flow down the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, the width of the nail T1 and the nail group T4 is narrowed by inclining the nail T1 toward the right first start port 631 (nail group T4 side), and the game ball flows down the right side of the right first start port 631. By reducing the ratio of playing, it is possible to increase the ratio of game balls flowing down the left side of the right first start port 631.

  The game ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by a nail group T3 (configured by five nails). The nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass therethrough (width). The game balls guided to the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down below the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), and all enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the game balls may naturally flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side or both).

  Here, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 640, it is set so that one prize ball is paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls launched into the right flow path PA2 are configured to win the second starting port 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state), the game balls launched by the player Of these, 85% is configured to be paid back as a prize ball. Therefore, the player can suppress consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball by firing the game ball in the right channel PA2 rather than firing the game ball in the left channel. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first start port 631 is configured not to win the second start port 640 by the nail group T2. Thereby, by adjusting the nail T1, it is possible to adjust the proportion of game balls that enter the second starting port 640, that is, the proportion that is paid back as a winning ball in the right-handed game.

  Next, when the electric accessory 632 is in a special state (a state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are rotated until they are substantially horizontal, an open state), the left guiding member 632a causes the left side of the right first start port 631 to be left. The flow path flowing down is closed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 632 is in a special state (open state), it is configured to prevent the game ball flowing down the right flow path from winning the second starting port 640. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3, the winning to the right first starting port 631 is increased, the winning to the second starting port 640 is decreased, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol is reduced. The number of executions (execution frequency) is increased. Furthermore, in the short-time game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be further reduced (lowered).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, since the variation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set short, the game is performed so as to fire the game ball in the right channel. As already described, since the ratio of the game balls winning the second start port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel, the player's balls will decrease. However, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is entered, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed during the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until the opening time of one round of the one variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time per round is other than that. Since it is extended more than the small hit in the game state, a winning ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting during the latent probability change is set to be 15% consumed by flowing down the right channel, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the player's ball. Has been. Therefore, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball even in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is prohibited to play a right-handed game (a game by launching a game ball into the right flow path PA2), and the second start port in the normal gaming state ST1. When a game ball wins at 640, abnormal processing is executed, and a warning display “Please play left-handed” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 640 in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Either left-handed game or right-handed game may be performed in all gaming states, or left-handed game or right-handed game may be performed in a specific gaming state May be. For example, a starting port for a first special symbol and a starting port for a second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, a game ball that flows down the left channel PA1 by performing a left-handed game and a game ball that flows down through the right channel PA2 by performing a right-handed game have a start port of the first special symbol, and a second What is necessary is just to comprise so that it can enter into the starting port of a special symbol. This eliminates the need to divide between left-handed games and right-handed games in all game states or specific game states, thereby reducing the player's game burden.

<Electric Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter C3 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 receives a prize for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second start opening 640 in which each counter value is stored for winning for the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631. And a second special symbol holding ball storage 203b in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four holding balls are provided at the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and a maximum of four holding balls are provided at the second starting port 640, respectively. A maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, a game ball is placed in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game. When a winning is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. . Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is moved to a first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and various kinds of display for variably displaying the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, When winning at the right first start port 631 and the second start port 640, if the number of reserves for the winning start port is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. And stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and one prize ball (in this example, one game ball) is obtained. Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631, and four for the second start port 640, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the number may be four, or the upper limit may not be provided.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Note that the first random number counter C1 is acquired in common for each of the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the balls are the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port. At the timing of winning a winning (start winning) 640, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. A jackpot is determined when the value matches a random jackpot value set by 202a (in this embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0-9” at high probability).

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are jackpots is 1 when the probability is low, the value “7” is 10 when the probability is high, and the value “0-9” is It is stored in the first per random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big win. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). ), And then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, the second start. At the timing of winning a winning (start winning) in the mouth 640, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening. It should be noted that the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which a game ball is detected at the first start port switch (not shown) or the second start port switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of place. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, The stop type is that of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As mentioned above, the jackpot type A, jackpot B, and jackpot E are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C and jackpot D are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol, as described above. Has been. The jackpot A to the jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to a probability change game state ST3 or a latent probability change game state ST2 in which the game state is a high probability game state.

  Note that the method of making the game ball passable to the probability variation switch 65e3 is not limited to the method described above. For example, a game ball that has entered can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (provided that the probability change switch 65e3 is provided), and a game ball that has entered cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (probability change switch 65e3). Is provided) and a non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. In the jackpot that allows the game state after the jackpot game to be transferred to the high probability game state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled so as to be opened and closed, and the game state after the jackpot game cannot be shifted to the high probability game state. , The V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, the switching member 65h is moved at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round) so that the game ball can pass to the probability variation switch 65e3. In the jackpot that allows the game state after the jackpot game to be transferred to the high probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the fourteenth round, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability gaming state. In the case of the jackpot that makes it impossible to shift to, control is performed so that the non-V variable winning device 652 is opened and closed in the 14th round. Thereby, since it is not necessary to change the control of the probability variation switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

  On the other hand, in the case of big hit B and big hit E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. It takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, when the big hit B and the big hit E, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The gaming state after the jackpot is configured not to be set to a highly probable gaming state. In the case of jackpot B and jackpot E that are not shifted to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. Thereby, in the big hit B and the big hit E, it is possible to surely prevent the game ball from passing to the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

  Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, since it is determined whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, it is possible to keep expectation for the probability change for a long time. Furthermore, since the proportion of probability change given to the first special symbol is different from that of the second special symbol, the player can play a game by changing the expectation level where the probability change is given depending on the difference of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. FIG. This jackpot type selection table A is used for determining the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot is reached in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the short-time gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. For jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value, and for jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “34 to 99” is the determination value. Is set as As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), one type of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99” is set as the determination value. In other words, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66% when the jackpot in FIG. On the other hand, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot A is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is set longer. This is a big hit in which a V winning release pattern is set in which an opening pattern in which a game ball can be awarded is given to the probability changing switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65 without being given a support state. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot where no power support state is given and no V winning opening pattern is set. The jackpot C is set to the jackpot at which the electric support state is given and the V winning opening pattern is set.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is assumed that the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (changed) is only the jackpot C, so that, for example, the jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud or the like. However, it is configured so as to suppress a problem that at least two jackpots are illegally given in the high probability gaming state without giving the latent probability changing gaming state ST2.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. This jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is established in the latent probability changing game state ST2. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types in special figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types in special figure 2, respectively.

  The jackpot E is a short jackpot at the time of 15 rounds, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the jackpot probability is set to a low probability state. In addition, since the variation time of the special figure 1 is set longer when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the big hit is the first variation of the first special symbol that has shifted to the latent probability changed game state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, there is an intention to rescue the player, and the jackpot E that is not selected in the normal gaming state ST1 is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be suppressed and the malfunction which the motivation for a game falls remarkably can be suppressed.

  In the case of big hit in special figure 2, jackpot C and jackpot D are set respectively. The jackpot D is composed of a jackpot in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set, it is highly likely that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability game state until at least two jackpot games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot type is set such that the jackpot D is more advantageous than the jackpot C in which the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set.

  In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set with “0 to 65” as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set with “66 to 99” as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is won, and the jackpot D is selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game in the expectation that the jackpot D is selected when the big special symbol is a big hit in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The ratio at which the jackpot A is selected is set to 34% (determination value “0 to 33”), and the ratio at which the jackpot B is selected is set to 66% (determination value “34 to 99”). ).

  As described above, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the big probability D is selected whenever the big special win is made in the second special symbol, so that the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set, and further, the player receives at least two. The high-probability gaming state is configured to be easily set continuously until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the electric accessory 632 is set to easily enter the special state (open state) (electric support) ), The number of balls entering the second start port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 for a normal symbol change time, and 30000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, the change time of 30000 ms having a long change time is selected with a low probability.

  The electric accessory 632 is not operated in a special state (open state) until the fluctuation time of 30000 ms elapses. During that time, the game ball is likely to win the second start port 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the game balls are incoming), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the game is out as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the variation time of 1800000 ms is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, so the second special symbol is usually set. Even in a state where the reserved balls are stored, a new lottery is not efficiently executed. However, since the probability of hitting the first special symbol is set to 1/80 during the probability variation gaming state ST3 (see FIG. 15 (b)), every time a winning is made with the first special symbol, The variation executed in the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the stored ball that is stored next is started. That is, by winning the small bonus with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol is increased, and it is set so that a lottery advantageous to the player can be easily executed. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope of winning a small win with the first special symbol, and can increase the player's expectation in addition to the big win. Note that the small lottery probability may be set as an appropriate value as appropriate.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball enters the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, or the second start port 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning (start winning).

  In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of starting winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing of starting the variation. Of course, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 may be selected at the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a) to 18 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. A variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 18A) for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2, a variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state ST3 or the short-time gaming state ST1h (FIG. 18 ( b)) is set respectively.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern type is set corresponding to the number of reserved balls when the variation starts, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the determination result. Note that the type of variation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the variation pattern, and mainly the variation time and the variation type (non-reach and various reach) are determined. The voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine more detailed contents of the variation pattern. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal gaming state ST1, the result of the determination of the success / failure as the variation time of the second special symbol is lost, and an extremely long variation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Has been. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. The business hours of the amusement store are generally long even from 9 am to 11 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, and the time is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a big hit by playing with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1. In the present embodiment, a long variation time is set for a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store can perform illegal game monitoring and guidance with the correct game method.

  In the present embodiment, the winning time is also a long variation time in the second special symbol, but in the winning case, it may be configured with a short variation time such as 500 ms. By comprising in this way, the extremely long hit fluctuation | variation is performed by a 2nd special symbol, and the malfunction by which a hit | toe fluctuation | variation is not performed by a 1st special symbol during that period can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol in the case of being out is configured as 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol that is a hit is composed of 500 ms and is set short. By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol of the first change becomes a big hit E after the transition to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of deviation from the second special symbol is 180000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the hit variation time is set to 5000 ms, and is set in accordance with a period during which a treasure chest effect to be described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second special symbols are configured so that the variable display that is a big hit does not change at the same time. In the case of the configuration, the variation display time that is a big hit of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol The variation time that becomes the big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol that may determine the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the second special in the meantime The jackpot C can be awarded to the player by winning the jackpot with a symbol. In this case, a configuration may be considered in which, when a big win is started in one special symbol, the lottery game that is changing in the other special symbol is invalidated. By configuring in this way, the jackpot C, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player, is given and determined immediately after the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, and the probability variation gaming state ST3 ends in a short period of time. Problems can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display with the success / failure determination result being the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol is a fluctuation that is out of place. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the variation time for the success / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the short-time game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lotteries with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed 100 times, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 100 times continuously with the second special symbol coming off and changing. The number of times that the second special symbol is variably displayed during the short-time game can be effectively reduced by configuring the time longer than the time when variably displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second per-random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15C).

  Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the sphere is changed to the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b ( It is acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through. The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the range is “5-9”. Further, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is determined that the winning is obtained when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired second random number counter When the value of C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83, and In the normal gaming state ST1, the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b of 632 are released once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment), and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time (this implementation) In the embodiment, the opening operation of 1s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner, and each counter based on the held ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. If no value is stored, a random value is acquired from the second random number counter C4 in a normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the corresponding number of holding times (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) with the random number value obtained from the second random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random number value is stopped, or the hold is digested. When data is shifted to the previous holding area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area which is newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether the data is stored in the reserved area or whether the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined depending on which reserved area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. Set different counters for each game (second special symbol), and update them with different values by changing the update triggers and initial values of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  Thus, by configuring, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, different counter values can be acquired. The fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the malfunction that the determination result of the success / failure is synchronized can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process at power-on (see FIG. 44). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. , Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability variation valid flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, hour / counter counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, prefetch reservation ball storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, short hour flag 203a2, other memory At least it has a Rieria 203z.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 630 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol. For details, refer to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) are started. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the winning detection are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is read from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer in the same manner as the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c includes a second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of the start winning of the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. A normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c includes four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag (not shown)) can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls in the order of passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning prize) Are stored in order from the reserved area in the earlier order.

  When the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol wins lottery. Or, it is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the second random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored as the normal symbol holding. Shift to a ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the mouth 630 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed at the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each counter counts up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the first special symbol hold based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), respectively. If stored, data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is used as the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 23, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a first normal symbol start port 67a or a second normal symbol start port 67b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. On the first symbol display device 37 based on the passing of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”) (the second symbol display device 83 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that data of the second random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the second per-counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced by one, the reserved area before the shift) The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the reserved area that is shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). If the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3). ). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON when the jackpot game ends (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the high probability gaming state (latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  When the probability variation setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. May be configured to return to the officially set to ON. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after executing a process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S1673 in FIG. 50). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are equal. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 14 rounds, and in the big hit B and the big hit E, the flow solenoid 65k is set to 0.5 based on the start of 14 rounds. Set to on for seconds. In the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, 1 is subtracted and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for discriminating the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this embodiment, a voice “watching the liquid crystal”). In this embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main controller 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  With this configuration, since the sound “Look at the liquid crystal” is output before the start of the 14th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, on the third symbol display device 81, a character of a girl is displayed, and a character of “attention” which is a notification that prompts the player to view the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined. In order for the player to keep expectation that the probability variation game state ST3 will be given until the end of the jackpot game, the player makes the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) invisible. An alerting effect is being executed. However, when the 13th round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is performed. Thereby, after an interval effect is performed, a player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and a player's attention can be diverted from operation | movement of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to alert the player to show the 3rd symbol display device 81 so as to distract the player from the switching member 65h. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting so that a player's hand may be held over the apparatus 65. FIG. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 13 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the effect that diverts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 14th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D or jackpot B, jackpot E is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time necessary for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203o is the time required for the game balls won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset round 1 is finished and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203o has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S1707 of FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, the impact is applied at the start timing of the 14th round, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, so that the big hit B and the big hit E Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the injustice of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the probability change game state ST3 is given illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow passage solenoid 65k being ON is the probability variation switch 65e3. Indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203p described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball is passed through the special discharge port 65e2 and passed through the probability change switch 65h, or played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a sphere is pushed up and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The hour / medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the hour / short gaming state ST1h. At this time, the short / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. In other words, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game, if the probability change game state ST3 is not set, the game state shifts to the 100-time short-time game state ST1h.

  The big hit flag 203u is based on the winning of the first start port 630, the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640, and the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1 is hit when the fluctuation starts. This flag is set to ON when determined. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised with the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, “10” is set to the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol, and “01” is set to the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol, At “00”, the big hit flag 203u is set off.

  Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, even if the other lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a miss. Thereby, it can process so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously may not be performed with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

  In other words, when the variation display that is a big hit with either one of the special symbols is started, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other side, and only the out-of-change manner is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. And you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, even when the variation display of the big hit B and the big hit E is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time is set to be long and the second special By making it easy to draw a lottery with a short variation time with a symbol, it is possible to make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect to play a game in order to win. Therefore, a fresh performance can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  The special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of S1011 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The pre-read hold storage area 203x stores determination information such as success / failure determination results, jackpot type, variation type, etc. for the hold balls stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. Storage area.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to make a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is out). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y is not a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

  The short time flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time short state (electric support state, normal symbol high probability gaming state). If the value of the hour / short flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time / short state (electric support state), and if the value of the hour / short flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state. Indicates a state (ordinary symbol low probability state). The short time flag 203a2 has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot type with electric support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (Refer to S1655 in FIG. 48). In the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next jackpot game is started. 29 (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36), or when the number of lotteries for special symbols in the short time (electric support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening port solenoid for opening and closing the specific winning port 65a, and an electric accessory. A solenoid 209 made up of a solenoid for driving and the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  Further, a vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the starting port is an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning port. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This variation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to a variation time indicated by a variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, a rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.), and a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation). One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of the display contents having the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f. , A special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, an effect counter 223j, a slave state setting area 223k, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Each of the winning information is stored. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a fluctuating effect (variable) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). Display) and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631, or in the special symbol in the main control device 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the first special symbol held after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball counter 223b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on a reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the sub-status setting area 223h, the current gaming status can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed-up gaming state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasure switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) circuit 253 is pressed when the power is turned on (while turning on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122)). In this case, the RAM erase signal SG2 is output to the main controller 110 to clear the backup data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member unless it is a method of leaving an opening mark such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. Yes.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is canceled, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after canceling the system reset via the bus line 240 and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, the left 7-segment LED of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment indicator 37b executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right 7-segment LED is displayed. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is executed. A through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the sphere is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control is performed. In this manner, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to be able to perform variable display at the same time, or are controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has elapsed, processing for stopping variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Is done. Further, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), the second special symbol is suspended and suspended with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big lottery game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process for forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is variably stopped with the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit), the first special symbol during the variable display may be suspended (temporarily stopped). Details of the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the retained data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol retained ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the retained data Processing is executed. In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the lottery result is a big hit (or small win), the big hit flag 203u (or small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thereby, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the first special symbol, control is performed so that the variable display of the second special symbol becomes an outlier variable display. The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when it is configured to interrupt (temporarily stop) the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the variable display when the second special symbol is suspended with the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit), What is necessary is just to comprise so that the process which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently temporarily stopped) may be performed.

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed. Then, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably stopped with the symbol indicating the big win (or small hit) and the big lottery game (or small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol in the variable display is displayed. Processing for forcibly stopping is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is changed and stopped with the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the reserved data Processing is executed. In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), if the lottery result is a big hit (or small win), the big hit flag 203u (or small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol becomes an outlier variable display. The second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when the first special symbol is configured to interrupt (temporarily stop) the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the variable display when the first special symbol is suspended with the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit), What is necessary is just to comprise so that the process which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol currently temporarily stopped) may be performed.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). . A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which will be described in detail later, is a result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability changing gaming state ST3 (probability changing) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state ST3 (probability change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (not likely to change)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) Based on the reference), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  When the process of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203u or the jackpot flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the second special symbol has started a change that becomes a jackpot or jackpot. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u (and the jackpot flag 203y) is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously won. It is configured so that no fluctuations are executed. By comprising in this way, the big hit (or small hit) generate | occur | produces continuously for a short time, and the malfunction which the loss by the side of a game store becomes large excessively can be suppressed. In addition, when the variation which becomes the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol is started, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed (the processing from S402 to S404 is skipped), and the first special symbol is changed. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display based on deviation (the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process (S410)). Thereby, since the lottery process (the process from S402 to S404) can be skipped, the processing load can be reduced.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the big special or small hit change is not started in the second special symbol (S405: No) ), It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S406: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is set on for the first special symbol (S407). Thereafter, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery result) is set to the jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C1. The game state is set based on the game state (S409). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406. In this case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation process is executed (S410). The special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but setting of the off symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out is executed.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually acquired is a big win, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to ON, In the case where a variation that becomes a big hit or a small hit is started by two special symbols, a setting that is forcibly removed is executed by the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, fluctuations that are big hits (or small hits) are not executed at the same time, and consecutive big hits (or small hits) are made in a short period of time. Since the fluctuation is started, it is possible to suppress the problem that the damage on the game shop side becomes excessive. Moreover, the big hit (or small win) is performed simultaneously or continuously, and the malfunction that a player will be confused can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to perform the big hit variation at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute simultaneously. In this case, a special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, It is conceivable to configure to temporarily stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 fluctuation variation process (S410) which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol deviating symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S416). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In this way, when the big win or the small win is set for the second special symbol, the detachable symbol is forcibly set for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which a variation that is a big hit or a small hit is executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), whether the lottery result is a small hit is Is determined based on the gaming state and the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) (S412). If it is determined in the process of S412 that it is not a small hit (S412: No), the lottery result is a failure, so the process of S416 is executed and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S412 that a small hit is made (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S414), and the small special symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 25) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S501 that the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability varying gaming state ST3, The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the short-time gaming state ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S504 (S505). Thereafter, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of small hits, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the processing of S512 is completed, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating a small hit is set (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, out of place) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) is set (S514). From the set fluctuation pattern selection table, a deviation pattern is selected based on the determination result (displacement) and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 (S515). Based on the selected deviation pattern, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S506), the processing of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special diagram 1). Is determined (S602). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

  When the processing of S603 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). Thereafter, the time-shortage counter 203t is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S606), and the time-shortage flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S607). Next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S601 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on is determined. It discriminate | determines (S610). If it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203y is off (S610: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on (S610 in FIG. 29), the second special symbol is stopped at the big hit or the small hit, In order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol, the processes of S611 and S612 are executed. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S612.

  In S612, a special figure 1 removal stop process for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in a manner of removal is executed. In the above-described processing of S602, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an outlier manner. A one-off stop process is executed (S612). When the process of S612 is finished, this process is finished.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. Processing for stopping the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is variably stopped with the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit) and the big lottery game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable is being displayed. A process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol (S612) is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is suspended by the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit) (S610: Yes), the configuration of the second special symbol during the variation display is suspended (temporarily stopped). May be.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the special figure 1 stop processing (S612) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 stoppage processing (S612). In the special figure 1 stop processing (S612), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command is set (S623) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped) (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). Thereafter, the process of S625 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, so S622. To S624, and the process proceeds to S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203t is a value greater than 0 (S625). If it is determined in the process of S625 that the hour / minute counter 203t is greater than 0 (S625: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203t is decremented by 1 and updated (S626), and the hour / hour counter 203t after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (S627). In the process of S627, if it is determined that the time-shortage counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), the time-shortage game state ST1h is ended, so the time-shortage flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S628). The process proceeds to S629.

  On the other hand, in the process of S627, if it is determined that the reduced time counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), the reduced time gaming state ST1h is continued, so the process of S628 is performed. Skip to step S629.

  In the process of S629, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of variably stopping the first special symbol that is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). Thereafter, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after executing the special figure 1 stoppage process (S608), this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. However, if the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the process of forcibly stopping the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, in the case where the second special symbol is to be changed and stopped based on the lottery result of the big win or the small win, the special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is set to ON so that the change of the first special symbol is stopped It is forcibly executed. Thereby, the simultaneous change with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, when the first big symbol or the second special symbol has already begun to be a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly released as a result of the determination of whether or not it is missed. Fluctuation display is started. Therefore, it can suppress that big hit and small hit are forcibly performed continuously, and can suppress the malfunction in which euphoria becomes high too much.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the first special symbol retention ball number of each process from S301 to S306 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) described above. The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306). In each process from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol reserved ball hit determination process (S705) Since the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same except for the change, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) in the following points. In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the process of S408 In the corresponding process of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol), and in the processes of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processes of S409 and S410, the first They are different in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted. Similarly, the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S810 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) is also the above-described special figure 1 deviation variation process (see FIG. 26). Since the same processing is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the first special symbol lottery result) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the second special symbol lottery result), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to the above processes, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207). The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, “for special figure 1” is changed to “for special figure 2”, and in the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 is used. The point that the variable stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 variable stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the process of S1004 corresponding to the process of S604, and S609 and The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag in the processes of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the process of S610, and the special figure 1 outage stop process is special in the process of S1011 corresponding to S611. FIG. 2 is different from that in FIG. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Similarly, the special figure 2 outage stop process (S1011 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) is also the above-described special figure 1 outage stop process (see FIG. 30). Since the same processing is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can be made. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  Even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if one of the first special symbols or the second special symbol generates a big hit game, the other Since the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won any of the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, and holds the game if it wins. Each counter value obtained up to the upper limit number (maximum of four for each of the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol. This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. When each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or based on each counter value memorize | stored in each of the 2nd special symbol reservation ball | bowl storage area 203b, the process which predicts a determination result or the variation pattern etc. selected beforehand is performed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first start opening 630 or a right first start opening 631 (start winning prize) (S1101). Here, a winning to the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 (the start win has been received) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is (N1). Obtained (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than 4 that is the upper limit value of the number of reserves for the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 (that is, whether the hold number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1105). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 is obtained. Are each stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 39, but the determination result of the success / failure determination and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Then, processing for determining the stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, with respect to each process from S1108 to S1114, the winning of the game ball to the first start port (the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631) executed in each process from S1101 to S1107 is performed. The only difference is that the process similar to the process performed in this step is a process executed on the second start port 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first look-ahead process (S1107) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the pre-read hold storage area 203x in the area with the smallest winning order (S1122).

  Based on the data stored in the read prefetch hold storage area 203x, the determination result is determined. It should be noted that the success / failure determination result determined here is determined in a case where it is a win in the normal gaming state ST1. Since the variation time is varied and set depending on the number of holdings, the timing for starting the variation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to determine the exact gaming state at the start of the variation. Therefore, it is only when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 having a common jackpot determination value is “7” in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state that the determination result can be accurately determined. Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a win during the normal gaming state ST1.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1123 that the result of the determination is a big win (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big win, and the first winning command indicating the jackpot type is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1123 that the result of the determination is wrong (S1123: No), a first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set (S1125). . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start port (the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631) and is newly reserved and stored, the stored and stored information is stored in the stored and stored information. Based on this, the determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation, and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of prefetching, the determination of success / failure is determined as the normal gaming state ST1, but not limited thereto, the gaming state at the start of variation is accurately determined, and the determination of success / failure is made based on the gaming state. It may be configured to execute. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not varied depending on the number of reserved balls, but it is possible to make a determination by configuring a certain variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the prefetching is executed, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the hold ball starts to change based on the stored information.

  Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch process (S1114).

  The second prefetch process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the fact that the first prefetch process (FIG. 39, S1107) wins the first start port (the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631). In contrast to the process of prefetching the hold data in advance and making various determinations, it is a process of prefetching the hold data based on winning in the second start port 640 and making various decisions. Since the same processing is executed only by the difference, detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. When one of the special symbols is subjected to a variable display that is a big hit or a small bonus, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed to be out of variation. Therefore, the first prefetch process or the second prefetch process described above may be configured to determine whether or not the lottery result is forcibly removed when prefetching. To do this, for example, when prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the lottery result to be prefetched is executed is calculated. Then, in the period in which the dynamic display is executed, it may be determined whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. Note that if the lottery result is out, it will be out regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. As a result, the processing load due to the above-described determination can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The normal symbol (second symbol) hit includes the period from the time when the second symbol display device 83 displays a hit to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632 being performed. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S1222). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S1222 (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1222 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). . In the process of S1223, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1218, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S1223, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S1213 and the processing of S1218. 2 Stop display (lights up) on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1224). If it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is out of place (S1224: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the normal symbol is not in a variable display (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the short time flag 203a2 is ON, that is, whether or not the short time gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is OFF (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for low probability, The determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / short flag 203a2 is ON (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1209). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted (S1209: Yes), the processing of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second per random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for high probability. Based on the above, the determination result is obtained (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a win (that is, it is out of place) (S1212: No), the display mode of “x” that is the display mode at the time of losing is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of “O” that is the display mode of the win is It is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether or not the short time flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the short time gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1214). In the process of S1214, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is OFF (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / short flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide members (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the process of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (that is, the low probability gaming state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short-time gaming state ST1h (including the probability variation gaming state ST3) (S1219). If it is determined that the time is short (S1219: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is obtained as the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (fig. 19), the variation time is determined (S1220). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the usual fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined based on the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the usual figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 19, in the usual figure variation pattern selection table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probability variation gaming state ST3 (probability variation: with electric support), there is one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal variation variation counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state ST3, the change time of 3000 ms is determined by the determination value “0 to 190”, and the change time of 30000 ms is determined by the determination value “191 to 198”.

  Thereby, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time longer than the other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long fluctuation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 is not operated until the fluctuation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, when the second starting port 640 is disposed below the electric accessory 632 and the electric accessory 632 is activated, the left starting member 632 a can win the second starting port 640. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is restricted.

  Here, as described above, when a variation time (30000 ms) having a long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so that the right-handed game during that time About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible to increase the number of winnings to the second start port 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probability variation gaming state ST3, a jackpot D is always selected when a win is made with the second special symbol, and a jackpot that is more advantageous than a jackpot with the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the player who is drawn by the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when it is a big hit than the lottery by the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give a period that is advantageous to the player by increasing the winning to the second starting port 640 during the probability variation gaming state ST3.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when a game ball has passed.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is a normal game state (S1302). . In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), since the right-handed game is executed in spite of the normal gaming state, the firing abnormality is not detected. The notification command shown is set, and the process proceeds to S1304. When a notification command indicating a firing abnormality is set, this process may be terminated as it is, and normal symbols may not be drawn.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1305).

  The ball does not pass through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. However, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1306). Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1401), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504). If it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505). (S1505: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown was not normally completed, the process proceeds to S1512 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1512 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1513, S1514) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1510). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In the main process (S1600), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 ends, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). The probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when a big hit A or big hit C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has entered, a process for setting data indicating that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability-changing game state ST3 is set in the jackpot state setting area.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the value. Then, the variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory 632 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the processes after S1251 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1256, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1259 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S1301), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1251. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 632 associated with the first right starting port 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) has ended. , The variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol (the first symbol is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65). ) Is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the second symbol display device starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S1212 or the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 41). )

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S 1608). SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1609). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1609: Yes), the process proceeds to S1601, and each process after S1601 described above is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1609: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1608, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 43 has been executed, the power-off process after S1612 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1601. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1601 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initialization processing (S1501) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a big jackpot or a jackpot of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29), the process of S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36), or S624 of the special special figure deviation stop process (see FIG. 30). If the process of S1024 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 37) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot or the jackpot is set, the special symbol jackpot or the jackpot is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when the big winning or the small winning of the special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

  The opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) depending on the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A and 5000 for big hit B). In such a case, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, if a big hit is made in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and if a big hit is made in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased. Can be shortened. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, a sufficient time can be secured for switching to a right-handed game (a big hit game). Thereby, the operation burden of the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, if the special symbol jackpot or jackpot is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot or jackpot is being hit (S1623). The special symbol jackpot or small jackpot is being displayed while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1623 (S1623: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is big hit or small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the opening to the variable winning device 65 and the probability variable solenoid corresponding to the jackpot type is executed in each round.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is set. The small hits consist of two rounds, and the open / close door 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1624 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1626 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball throwing time has elapsed. It is determined as When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), an ending process is executed (S1630). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652). In the process of S1652, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1653), and the process proceeds to S1654. Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be turned off based on the probability variation flag 203g being turned on.

  In the processing of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support (jackpot C) (S1654). In the process of S1654, if it is determined that the jackpot type is the type with the electric support (S1654: Yes), the time reduction flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is not the type with jackpot (jackpot C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1652 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is OFF (S1652: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1656). If it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot E in the processing of S1656 (S1656: Yes), 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203t (S1657), the processing of S1655 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1656 that the big hit type is not big hit E, the processing of S1657 and S1655 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set a high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so even during the jackpot game It is possible to play a game with an interest in whether or not a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is performed when it is detected in the 13th round that 10 balls have been won or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1632 that it is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the 2-second counter in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the interval time, which is the ball throwing time after the 13th round is finished, and the sound of watching the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, although the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, since the player is attracted attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It is possible to suppress the jackpot type being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play a game with the expectation that the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1221 that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), a notification command is set (S1666). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting “Look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1632). Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1632).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1671). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). When it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1671: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). Thereafter, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1672: No), the processing of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set (S1676). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). Thereafter, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1674 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the processing of S1678 is executed.

  In the processing of S1678, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682). Thereafter, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1685). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1688). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to off (S1690). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1690). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

  Accordingly, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state ST3 can be set in consideration of the time of ball removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state ST3 from being granted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1633). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality process (S1633). In the abnormal process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1701). If it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). Thereafter, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the processing of S1704 is executed.

  In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of winning (value of the winning number counter 203j) match. Is determined (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the processing of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). Thereafter, the process of S1709 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B is set.

  In the processing of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1710). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1711), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2116 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 53). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53, S2113), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S2116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2116 is executed (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If the time has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2110. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S2101 is processing related to display (production) in S2102 to S2110, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variable display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S2111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is executed to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 variation start process (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the setting necessary for variably displaying the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2242). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the processing of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (a gaming state without probability changing power support) (S2243). If it is determined that the gaming state is other than the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (S2243: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the game is in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (S2243: Yes), the lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol that starts the variation is a variation that becomes a big hit E (15R normal big hit: 100 electric support). Is discriminated (S2244). When it is determined that the variation is not the big hit E (S2244: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is a big hit E (S2244: Yes), a character indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is entered, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol, which is set to be long for the player and disadvantageous to the player, is set short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol which is mainly executing the game is set to be long. Thus, when the player shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the player hits the right and plays a game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start varying simultaneously. Here, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when the jackpot is reached, but in the first special symbol, a normal probability game (low probability game) is awarded in the first special symbol. May be given by lottery. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a big hit and even if the big hit A (15R probability variable big hit: no electric support) is given, the variation started with the first special symbol after the big hit game is the big hit E As a result, the player immediately shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

  As described above, normally, after the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the game is mainly played with the second special symbol, the third symbol display is started based on the start of the change to the big hit E with the first special symbol. The chance zone (notification mode indicating the short-time gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3) is displayed on the device 81. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the game is in the latent probability changing game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81. Until is executed, it is recognized that the high probability gaming state (probability change) is maintained (highly likely). However, in the chance zone, the player cannot be sure (great expectation) that the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be awarded even after the next jackpot, and may be in the short-time gaming state ST1h (low probability state). A game will be played while recognizing.

  Thus, for example, if the game shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 and the first variation of the first special symbol is a variation that becomes a big hit E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. Thereby, the malfunction which a player becomes discouraged within a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the special chart 1 variation start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command ( S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state ST3 (a gaming state with probability transformation support) (S2203). If the game state is other than the probability variation game state ST3 (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning / non-judgment result of the second special symbol starting to fluctuate is a jackpot (S2304). Here, the discrimination is executed by discriminating whether the variation pattern is a big hit from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big win (S2304: Yes), a notice effect command per treasure box is set for the display control device 114 (S2305). . On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, a treasure chest removal notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the notice effect command per treasure box is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the 2 display area Dn, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is a treasure box symbol, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9A and the display mode shown in FIG. Are repeatedly displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), and can be displayed as blinking.

  Here, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the long deviating variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected if the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is deviating. Therefore, the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started is extremely reduced. However, if you win a small win with the first special symbol, based on the stoppage of the change, the change of the second special symbol that is changing is also forcibly stopped and is newly stored after the small hit game The change for the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. In this case, the player expects that the variation that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily started.

  When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, a treasure box indicating the variation of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed large in the first display area Dm. . On the other hand, a variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure chest is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, when the treasure chest is opened and the result of success / failure determination is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10B, “congratulations” from the treasure chest. Is displayed, and it is informed that the second special symbol is a big hit. And the alerting | reporting aspect which shows that the probability variation game state ST3 of "chance continuation!" Is performed continuously is displayed.

  In the case where the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot of FIG. 2 is selected in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (that is, the transition to the latent probability varying gaming state ST2), the latency probability variation is selected. What is necessary is just to display the alerting | reporting aspect (For example, the character "entering heaven zone!") Which shows changing to game state ST2. In this case, a notification mode for instructing to stop the launch of the game ball “Stop firing!” Should be displayed. Here, instructing to stop the launch is that the game is mainly executed with the first special symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, but the game is mainly performed with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2. Set to do. Therefore, when the game ball enters the right first start port 631 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is stored, it is a chance that a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. By instructing, the problem can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display for opening the treasure box is executed in the same manner as the case where the result of determination of success / failure is a big win. The word “sorry” indicating that the determination result is out of place is displayed. After that, when 5 seconds have passed after the start of fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and blinking is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol has elapsed. Is done.

  Thereby, even if the player has a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period of time when the second special symbol starts to change, Can focus on the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game is easy to understand, and the player can play the game with good feeling.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), stop type command reception processing is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable.

  It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is a big hit A (15R probability variable big hit: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than jackpot A (S2314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special diagram 1) hold 1 (the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in the fastest digestion order area) ) Is determined as to whether or not the result of determining whether or not the holding ball is a big hit E (15 rounds, normal big hit: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random number value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main controller 110, It is configured such that the sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not the result is correct in the probability variation state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the “chance zone entry” character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is ending. A display command to be instructed is set to the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the jackpot game is ending, the heaven zone (latency probability change game state ST2) is entered. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character “entering heaven zone !!” indicating the transition is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the game state shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability changing game is easily set continuously until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been committed when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game, expecting the transition to the latent probability change game state ST2, improving the interest of the game it can.

  In addition, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability change gaming state ST2 in the first special symbol hold 1, the jackpot A ending is the short-time gaming state ST1h or Since the characters “chance zone entry!” Indicating that the game state is in the probable game state ST3 are displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the short-time game state ST1h It is possible to play a game by recognizing that it is the probability variation gaming state ST3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game has shifted to the latent probability changing game state ST2, and the discouragement of shifting to the time-saving game state ST1h in a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the second special symbol reserved ball included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is an audio lamp The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. Every time there is a start winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol of the main controller 110 by the process of S2207. It can be adjusted to the values of the reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when a start winning is detected. Then, it can be set to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning command processing is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S2210). In the winning command process (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be identified, and the reservation order (the number of held balls) and the determination result in the normal gaming state ST1 can be determined. ing. Furthermore, the counter value obtained at the time of starting winning is composed of commands that can also be discriminated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (S2402). In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. Is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no probability variation jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the process of S2403 and S2404 is not executed, and the process directly proceeds to S2405. On the contrary, when it is determined that there is information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), a notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process in S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). In the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (in this embodiment, “0 to 50”) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command is displayed on the display control device 114 for displaying the characters “Please stop firing!” For informing the symbol display device 81 to stop the game ball firing (S2503). Exit.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning information that is a promising big hit, that is, a big hit A is received in the normal gaming state ST1, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when a transition is made from the normal gaming state ST1 to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the main special gaming method is the game in the second special symbol (the second special symbol is subject to substantial variation). ) However, when the big hit A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if a holding ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Will be. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold for winning the jackpot A is stored in the normal gaming state ST1, the notification for stopping the launch of the game ball is executed by lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Can be stopped, and winning to the first start port 630 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can recognize early that the jackpot is A by being notified of the stop of the launch, and can diversify the effects of the game.

  In this embodiment, the game ball launch stop notification is executed by lottery. However, when the big hit A holding ball is stored, it may be configured to be notified.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that no winning command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that a status command is received (S2211: Yes), status command reception processing (S2212) is executed. Details of the status command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the status command reception process (S2212).

  In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed based on the state command received from the main controller 110 (S2601). Whether the gaming state has been changed is determined by comparing the gaming state information set in the sub-status setting area 223k with the received gaming state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (that is, the short time gaming state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the short time gaming state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (“Ox” in the present embodiment) is displayed in the second display region Dn. Thus, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display characters of “lower bound zone” indicating the normal gaming state ST1 is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2602 that the gaming state has been changed to other than the normal gaming state ST1 (S2602: No), the gaming state is changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (the gaming state without the probability changing power support). (S2605). If it is determined in S2605 that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display region Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display region Dn. The display command to be set is set. In addition, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. The

  Next, in the first special symbol hold 1, it is determined from the winning information storage area 223 b whether hold information for determining the jackpot E is stored (S <b> 2607). When the hold information in which the hold 1 in the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the characters indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display command to be set is set (S2608). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying characters indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). . Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, the player can be prevented from displaying the heaven zone when the big hit E occurs immediately after the transition to the latent probability changing state ST2 and the transition to the short-time gaming state ST1h. It is possible to prevent (suppress) excessive disappointment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2605 that the game state has shifted to a game state other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (that is, the probability change game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability change game state ST3 (game with probability change support) The main display area setting command corresponding to (status) is set to the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display region Dn (the treasure chest symbol in this embodiment (FIG. 9A)). (See (b))), a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set.

  Then, a display command for displaying the chance zone characters on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not a notification command has been received (S2213). If it is determined in S2213 that the notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. A command is set (S2215), and this process ends. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through-gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the firing abnormality (“Please turn left!” Sound) is output. Further, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the transmitted notification command indicating the launch abnormality set in the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 42) described above, a display indicating the launch abnormality (“Please left-hand! ”Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2219), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2705 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the change pattern in the change display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 change pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Obtained from 223z, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). When the display is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decreased by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Thus, a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the processing of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed by the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retained ball of the second special symbol) The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is reduced by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S2709: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. If the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set off, and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set off (S2710). ).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (either 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) based on the stop type. A display special figure 1 stop type command for notification is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 determines whether the stop type (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) ) Is displayed (S2712). Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

  With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can do.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can play a game by switching a special symbol that sets a long-time variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It was configured to control possible special symbols. In the latent probability changing state ST2, only the jackpot that becomes the high probability gaming state (latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability varying gaming state ST3) is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the big hit. Even after the jackpot is executed, the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when the game state shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability change state can be set until the jackpot is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that the jackpot is guaranteed twice when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is entered.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured that 85% of the right-handed game balls win the second start opening 640 in a state where the electric accessory 632 does not operate. Furthermore, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is about 15% of the right-handed game balls as a winning ball for the player as a small hit game. It is set with the probability of being paid out at. Therefore, when the operating frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set to be low (non-electric support state), even in the latent probability changing game, the game is performed in a state in which the decrease in the player's ball is suppressed when a right-handed game is played. be able to.

  Furthermore, if a big hit is made with the second special symbol from the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, it shifts to the probability changing gaming state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened. Then, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, either a big hit that is shifted to the probability-changing gaming state ST3 or a big hit that is transferred to the normal gaming state ST1 is awarded by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in anticipation of whether or not he can win two more jackpots. Further, by providing a case where the probability changing gaming state ST3 is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1, it is possible to prevent the gambling ability from becoming too high. In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the game may be shifted to either the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or the normal gaming state ST1 by a jackpot based on the first special symbol. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of transitioning from the probability-changing gaming state ST3 to the latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 in which two big hits can be obtained again, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the big hit is made in the first special symbol that mainly plays games, the lottery ratio of jackpot A to which the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is awarded is set lower than the lottery ratio of jackpot B Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty level of transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2 and to suppress the increase in euphoria.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is configured to be switched when a jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state can be switched according to the type of the jackpot even when a bonus game is won. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the gaming state is switched by configuring the small win more easily than the big win. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is more advantageous by winning a small hit, and the player can be expected to win a small hit. In addition, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and gambling can be suppressed.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view in which the right side area of the game board 13 is enlarged.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in the front view and the ball guiding path forming member 70 is on the right side area of the game board 13 in the front view. The lower right decorative member 71 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the second starter 640 is accompanied by the second ordinary electric accessory 640a when viewed from the front of the game board 13. A point provided on the side, a point where the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and a normal symbol start port (through) instead of the first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b. The difference is that the gate 670 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the right first starting port 631 is deleted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like. The first start port 630, the second start port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, with reference mainly to FIG. 64, the point added with respect to 1st Embodiment about the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When a game ball passes through the through gate 670, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the through gate 670, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2). After the symbol “x” is alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “x”) is stopped (lit).

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric combination 640a is maintained in an upright state so as to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 640 in a normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric combination When the object 640a is actuated, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and allows the game ball to enter the second start port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first start port 630 and the second start port 640, whether or not a big hit is determined (a big hit lottery) is determined, and determination of the big hit type is made Also do. The jackpot type will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 74. As the jackpot type determined here, there are eight types of jackpot types A to H, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). The eight types of jackpot types include the length of the interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), the availability of the V operation, and the presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game ends (whether it is easy to put the second ordinary electric accessory 640a in a special state) No) is set in combination.

  Here, the length of the interval time refers to a predetermined timing (probability change switch) to the first variable winning device 65 provided with a special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with a probability change switch 65e3. It is the length of the interval time set in order to change whether or not it is possible to guide (easy or difficult) at a timing capable of passing 65e3.

  The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80. In this embodiment, the interval time between specific rounds in the jackpot game (the round in which the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes (in this embodiment, 4R) and a timing at which the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 by changing the round time (5R in the present embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 performs an opening / closing operation. Whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 at the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult). )) Can be set.

  Whether or not the V operation is possible means whether or not the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special outlet 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult). If the V operation is possible, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is set to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, while the V operation is not possible. In this case, the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it cannot pass (difficult) through the probability changing switch 65e3. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted, but in this embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. By controlling the above, whether or not the V operation is possible can be set.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the V operation is performed is set by driving and controlling the switching member 65h. However, any device that can set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 may be used. A lid member that is driven to open and close at regular intervals is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability change prize switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains the game ball is provided further upstream of the lid member. A configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the probability change prize winning switch 65e3 only when the timing at which the stopper member is released matches the timing at which the lid member is opened. By using such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to grasp that the lid member is regularly opened, and the player is allowed to win a game ball in the first specific winning opening 65. If this is the case, it can be assumed that there is a possibility of passing through the probability change switch 65e3, and the motivation of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, by changing the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 that opens the first specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65, It may be possible to set whether or not the sphere can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  The presence / absence of electric support is used to set whether or not the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily moved to a special state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over.

  In the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set as jackpot types of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) as in the case of the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as variable winning devices that are operated in an open state during the big hit game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in a specific round during the jackpot game (the fifth round in the present embodiment), the first specific winning port 65a has a predetermined period ( In this embodiment, it is operated to be released until 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter (see FIG. 80B).

  On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and rounds other than the specific round during the jackpot game (1st to 4th rounds and 6th to 7th rounds in this embodiment). The second specific winning opening 650a is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guide path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball launched by a right-handed game is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The ball guiding path forming member 70 has an opening 70a that is an opening through which a game ball launched by a right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. Members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d), and a game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d The discharge part 70e from which the gas is discharged is assembled as one unit.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the position of the opening 70a and the discharge portion 70e) and the member (each guiding member) for guiding the game ball is deviated. In addition, it is possible to suppress the problem that the positional relationship between the guide members is shifted, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be increased in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 configured with the first variable winning device 65 is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decorative member 71 includes a fourth guide member (fourth guide surface) 71a that receives a game ball rolled on the third guide member 70d of the ball guide path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, The decorative portion 71b is assembled and configured as one unit.

  The decoration portion 71b is provided with a decoration lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it can be emphasized that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is open during the big hit game. Has been. Specifically, the surface of the decoration portion 71b (the surface that can be visually recognized by the player) is formed of a half mirror, and when the decoration lamp is turned off, the inside of the first variable prize winning device becomes difficult to visually recognize. When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decoration lamp is turned on so that the inside of the first variable winning device can be visually recognized.

  With this configuration, the player can easily be aware that the game state is aiming at the first specific winning port 65a, and the player is not playing a game or in a normal game state (during a big hit game) In a gaming state that is not, it is possible to prevent (difficult) the player from seeing (difficult) the structure in the first variable prize-winning device 65. For example, an action that inserts the switch and deforms the switching member) can be made difficult.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. A ball guiding path 72 is formed in the right region of the game board 13 by the ball guiding region forming member 70 and the fourth guiding member 71a described above. The ball guiding path 72 is configured such that a game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right side area of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guiding path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the first guide member 70b in the lower right direction. The lower end portion of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball flowing down the first guide member 70b falls on the second guide member 70c.

  The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end portion of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

  The third guide member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the third guide member 70d in the lower right direction. The lower end portion of the third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guiding member 71a, and the game ball that has flowed down the third guiding member 70d passes through the discharge portion 70e and onto the fourth guiding member 71a. Fall.

  The fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when the game board is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows downward (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a. ) The lower end portion of the fourth guiding member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and when the first specific winning port 65a is in the closed state, the fourth guide The game ball that has flowed down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the open / close door 65f1, and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13 (the region where the through gate 670 and the second start port 640 are disposed). Composed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guiding path 72 (guidance path passing time) is meandered. It is possible to set a longer time than when not.

  Furthermore, each guide member constituting the ball guide path 72 is configured such that the inclination angle becomes gradually smaller from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow velocity of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and the opening and closing that communicates with the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a on the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be simultaneously retained (rolled) on the door 65f1.

  Therefore, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game ball is configured to fall on an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction between the guide members, so that the flow-down speed of the game ball can be efficiently reduced. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, in order to simultaneously hold (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is relaxed and the flow down speed of the game balls is reduced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material having a high friction coefficient (urethane or the like) may be attached to the game ball rolling surface of the guide member to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the open / close door 65f1 meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. May be. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent a step from occurring between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the fourth guide is provided. The member 71 a is provided in the lower right decorative member 71 configured separately from the ball guide path forming member 70. By configuring in this way, for example, when the ball guide path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guide member 71a Only by changing the shape to the shape corresponding to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball guiding path forming member 70 can be diverted. That is, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the opening 70a of the ball guiding path 72 described above is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened (the attacker 650b is opened). In the operated state), the game ball is configured so that it cannot pass (is difficult) through the opening 70a.

  The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, a period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is closed. By changing the length, the first variable winning device can be used when the gaming ball that has passed through the ball guiding path 72 can pass the probability changing switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65. Whether or not to win 65 is configured to be controllable.

  In the present embodiment, the two variable prize-winning devices are arranged apart in the vertical direction, and the upper variable prize-winning device (second variable) is provided by providing the ball guiding path 72 between them (in the path along which the game ball flows down). The winning ball 650) has been configured to delay the time for a game ball that has passed without winning a prize to reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65). Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and the ball guiding path 72 may be provided between them.

  Further, a plurality of variable winning devices and the ball guiding path 72 therebetween may be assembled and configured as one unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the assembling work to the game board 13 and to improve the manufacturing efficiency.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the game ball meanders in the left-right direction of the game board is used as the ball guide route 72. However, if the time for the game ball to pass through the ball guide route 72 is a predetermined time or more, Other configurations may be used. For example, the configuration may be such that the path meanders in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13, or the configuration may mean that the game ball meanders in three dimensions using both the left and right directions and the depth direction.

  In the present embodiment, the distance that the game ball flows down is the time for the game ball to pass through the right area of the game board 13 (the time during which the game ball flows down from the second variable winning device 650 to the first variable winning device 65). It is realized to extend for a predetermined time or more by using a configuration for extending the game time or a configuration for delaying the speed at which the game ball flows down, but other methods may be used. For example, a regulating member that regulates the flow of the game ball is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the time for the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72 by electrically driving the regulating member at regular intervals or at regular intervals. You may make it the structure made into predetermined time or more. By using the electrically driven regulating member in this way, it is possible to more reliably set the time for passing through the ball guiding path to be a predetermined time or more.

  In the second embodiment, the game ball is difficult to win at the first start port 630 during the right-handed game. However, the first start port is located in the right area of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment. 631 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a limit (100 times) to the number of times that the electric support is given in the probability variation game state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, and the flow in which various game states are set Is different. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the transition ratio between the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is ended, the special symbol type (two types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state). It is different from the first embodiment described above in that a total of eight types can be set by combinations of ST1, short-time gaming state ST1h, latent probability varying gaming state ST2, and probability varying gaming state ST3. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed aiming at a first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided at the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is subject to substantial variation. Specifically, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol game is 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30000 ms (30 seconds). Time is selected, and 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change at the same time in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is not changed until the second special symbol ends one change. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (minimum 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be made a substantial change target.

  And, in the normal game state ST1, if the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big win, a big hit B (7R normal big hit: no electric support) and a big hit D (7R normal big hit: electric support available) ), Jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: with electric support) and jackpot H (7R normal hit: without electric support) are selected.

  Here, when the big win is won in the first lottery game during the normal gaming state ST1, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) is set to 50% after the jackpot is over. The probability of transition to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or short-time gaming state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the big win B, D, H is won in the first lottery game, When the normal gaming state ST1 is set again and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game ends.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game as described above in the first embodiment. Even if the jackpot E is won in the lottery game, if the game ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state ST3 is not set, and the probability change game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a big hit When the probability is low, the short game state ST1h (low probability: with electric support) is entered.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game is determined according to the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game). The game state to be transferred after completion may be different, but when explaining the flow of setting various game states, the game state that can be changed according to the jackpot type (the game state is changed by performing the game normally). (Game state) will be described as a transition destination after the jackpot game ends.

  In the normal gaming state ST1, if the second lottery game is performed, it is set so as not to shift to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends and to shift to the 100% low-probability state (see FIG. 74). ). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being performed illegally during the normal game state ST1.

  Next, the probability variation gaming state ST3 that shifts with a probability of 50% when a big win is won in the first lottery game during the normal gaming state ST1 will be described. In the probability variation game state ST3, a right-handed game is performed aiming at a second start port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the probability variation gaming state ST3, the second special symbol is subject to substantial variation. Specifically, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, a variation time of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game, It is configured that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). Thus, by making the variation time of the first special symbol longer and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it becomes possible to make the second special symbol subject to substantial variation. .

  And, when the big win is made in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability: Either no power support or big hit G (7R: low probability: with power support) is selected.

  Here, if the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 70% after the jackpot is over. If the probability of shifting to the low probability state (the normal gaming state ST1 or the short-time gaming state ST1h) is set to 30% and the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game ends When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the big hit G is won in the second lottery game, the short time gaming state ST1h is set.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the electric support is ended when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, if the first lottery game is performed, the ratio of shifting to the high probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to 10%, and the ratio of shifting to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

  Next, a description will be given of the latent probability changing game state ST2 that shifts by 10% when the big win is won in the second lottery game in the probability changing game state ST3. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, a right-handed game aiming at a second start port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is performed. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is subject to substantial variation. Specifically, in the latent probability varying gaming state ST2, a variation time of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game. In addition, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). Thus, by making the variation time of the first special symbol longer and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a subject of substantial variation. .

  And, in the latent probability change game state ST2, if the big win in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability) : No power support) is selected.

  Here, if the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the probability of transition to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 100% after the jackpot is over. Is set so as not to shift to the low probability state (the normal gaming state ST1 or the short-time gaming state ST1h), and if the big win E is won in the second lottery game, the probability variation gaming state after the big winning game ends When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game ends.

  Next, the short time gaming state ST1h will be described. In the short-time gaming state ST1h, a left-handed game is performed aiming at a first start port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13. During the short-time gaming state ST1h, the first special symbol is subject to substantial variation. Specifically, in the short-time gaming state ST1h, a variation time of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game, As a variation time of one special symbol, 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 77). Thus, by making the variation time of the first special symbol longer and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a subject of substantial variation. .

  And, in the short-time gaming state ST1h, if the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, the big hit A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and the big hit C (7R: low probability: One of the jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the short-time gaming state ST1h, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 95% after the jackpot is over. The probability of transition to a low probability state (the normal gaming state ST1 or the short-time gaming state ST1h) is set to 5%. If the jackpot A or C is won in the first lottery game, When the game state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is finished, the probability variation game state ST3 is set and when the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is finished. The latent probability changing game state ST2 is set.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, the short-time gaming state ST1h is provided with electric support, and in the gaming state in which the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is likely to be in a special state. However, as described above, the first special symbol is subject to substantial variation during the short-time gaming state ST1h, and the second special symbol is a long variation, so that the second start port during the short-time gaming state ST1h A game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. In addition, since the second starting port 640 is set to one game ball, even if a game is performed in which a right-handed game is played during the short-time gaming state ST1h and a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 640. There is no increase in the number of balls to be played. Therefore, in the short-time game state ST1h, the same game as the normal game state ST1 (left-handed game) is performed.

  The flow of setting various game states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, the main game characteristics (transition of various game states) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

  First, in the normal game state ST1, in the first lottery game, the jackpot E is won and the probability change game state ST3 is aimed (assignment 50%). Next, the probability variation game state ST3 wins the jackpot F while performing the second lottery game and aims at the latent game state ST2 (distribution 10%). Alternatively, the special symbol game is performed 100 times without making a big hit, and the electric support is terminated to aim at shifting to the latent game state ST2.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, since the jackpot in which the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set again after the jackpot game occupies 60% of the entire jackpot, the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 while acquiring a bonus ball. It will aim to migrate.

  In addition, the probability variation game state ST3 is configured to win a small hit as a lottery result of the second lottery game, and to play a game without reducing the number of balls by playing the small hit game.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again accounts for 90% of the total jackpot. This latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is a gaming state in which the pachinko machine 10 can be most expected to appear. The detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but the latent probability changing game state ST2 is configured to be able to acquire more balls than the probability changing game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hit game. . That is, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls in the small hit game and the big hit game, and the same mode is repeated (looped) with a probability of 90% after the big hit game ends. It is configured.

  Further, in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the high probability gaming state transition rate of the second lottery game is 100%, and even if the remaining 10% is won instead of the 90% looping the latent probability varying gaming state ST2, It only shifts to the gaming state ST3. In other words, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, at least twice (ST2 → ST3, ST3 → ST1h twice) can be won in the high probability gaming state.

  Lastly, the short-time gaming state ST1h is a gaming state that is set when a transition is made from a high probability state to a low probability state (falling down), and the number of changes in the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (100 in this embodiment). It is a gaming state where electric support is given until). At this time, the short game state ST1 is set to have a higher ratio of transition to the high probability game state after the jackpot than the normal game state, and if the first lottery game is won in the short lot game state ST1, The rate of transition to the probabilistic gaming state is set to 95% (the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 70% and the latent gaming state ST2 is 25%). And when the frequency | count of fluctuation of a special symbol exceeds 100 times, it transfers to normal game state ST1.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, short-time gaming state ST1h, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability varying gaming state ST3). Based on the configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios to shift to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and further, it is configured to be able to change a special symbol that is a substantial variation target according to the gaming state, so in the normal gaming state ST1 When the second lottery game that is not a target for substantial variation is performed, it is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). By configuring in this way, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high probability game state). There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Further, the target of substantial change in the latent probability changing game state ST2 which is a high probability gaming state is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol is changed, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability changing game state ST2. In such a case, since it is configured to shift 100% to the high probability gaming state, it is possible to make a big hit state with the high probability gaming state at least twice in a part of the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties, and there is an effect that the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation control of various devices, the description of the same operation control as that of the first embodiment described above is omitted, and the details of the other operation control will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, when a jackpot game is started, various devices related to the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) are operated by the main controller 110 a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 executes an effect display corresponding to the big hit game on the third symbol display device 81.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) to open the second specific winning port 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after a predetermined period t1 (opening period) has elapsed. ). The attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when either a predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed or a predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in an open state is defined as one opening period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (seven times in the present embodiment) in one jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the second specific prize opening 650a is always open during the opening period t2. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specific prize opening is closed and closed during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated to repeat the state. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the opening period t2 is set when the predetermined period has passed or the predetermined number of winnings are satisfied after the second specific winning opening is first opened. It will end.

  Then, after the end of one round, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) has elapsed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, a game is executed in which the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device is opened from the first round to the fourth round. The game is executed to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65.

  Next, the flow between the fourth round and the fifth round in which the specific winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have the interval period set to 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have the interval period set to 4 seconds.

  Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game ball launched by a right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in a closed state, and then guides the ball. By passing through the path 72, it is configured to be able to win the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The sphere guide path 72 is designed so that the sphere guide path passage time is 3 to 4 seconds.

  Further, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 at the same time when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (the attacker 65b is on) (V The release operation is controlled to be on), and the mode (the state where the V release operation is on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in this embodiment), and the game is played after the elapse of the predetermined period (V release period) t5. The sphere is controlled so as to operate in a manner in which it cannot pass (difficult) through the probability change switch 65e3 (V opening operation is off).

  In other words, during the big hit game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, the V that is the sum of the specific interval period t4 and the period (2 seconds) t5 during which the V release operation is on. The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the ball guiding path passage period (maximum 4 seconds in this embodiment). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V release period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds. It is longer than the route passing period (maximum 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650a in the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guide path 72), the game ball that has passed through the ball guide path 72 is V-effective. It is possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the period t6 and pass the probability variation switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the V effective period t6 is set to be shorter than the ball guiding path passage period, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the V effective period t6. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the jackpot game that can substantially pass V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the gaming state. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that is impossible (difficult) to pass through. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit game can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot pass (difficult)) and set the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the gaming state when winning the jackpot Configured to set.

  In this embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation content of the switching member 65h is changed, so that an operation pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) and a non-passage. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. You may comprise so that the (easy) operation pattern and the operation pattern which cannot pass (difficult) may be set.

  Specifically, first, when the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5 rounds in the present embodiment) is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In other words, when a game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (easy) through the probability change switch 65e3. Drive. An opening / closing door opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continuously opens for 29 seconds) that allows a game ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a (e.g., an opening pattern that continuously opens for 29 seconds) and an opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 to the first specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot be won (difficult) is configured to be changeable (for example, an opening pattern in which 0.4 second opening is repeated five times from the start of five rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds).

  With such a configuration, an operation pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) and a non-passing pass only by changing the opening pattern of the door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (difficult) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and to provide various game characteristics for the player and to improve the interest of the game. .

  In addition, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state in which a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult) In the case of using a configuration that enables setting of the state of the machine, the timing for starting the driving of the switching member 65 is not limited to the timing for starting the driving of the first variable winning device 65, for example, the pachinko machine 10 The operation may be controlled so as to repeat a constant operation at a timing when the power is turned on.

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state in which a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult) By using the configuration that enables setting of the state, the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on can be set longer than 2 seconds. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can be more reliably passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period. The configuration may be adopted. For example, the ball guide path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guide path 72, may be switched. Moreover, you may comprise so that the value of V effective period t6 may be changed by changing the value of V open | release period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round during the big hit game is shown, but for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period to be changed according to the game state may be the opening period t1.

  By configuring in this way, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guidance path passing time, the right game starts when the jackpot game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the sum of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball that is hit right by the start of the big hit game is the first within the V effective period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  As a specific configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate a plurality of times within one round. (It is configured so that the first specific winning opening 65a repeats the open state and the closed state within one round), and the game ball that won the prize when the specific winning opening 65a is first opened opens the probability variation switch 65e3. It is good to comprise so that it can pass. In addition, the open / close door 65f1 that is operated to open the first specific winning opening 65a is composed of a plurality of members that perform different predetermined movements, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform a specific operation. You may comprise so that a mouth may be in an open state.

  By using the specific configuration described above, even when a jackpot game with a short opening period t1 (a jackpot game in which a game ball cannot pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (difficult) is set), an open state (within one round) Since the game ball wins at the specific winning opening in the second open state of (2), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the open / close door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the elapse of the interval period t3 (second The specific winning opening 650a is in an open state). Thereafter, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7th round) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650a of the final round (7th round) is closed, the ending period t7 has passed and the jackpot game is played. finish.

  On the third symbol display device 81, while the jackpot game is being performed, an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, in the early stage of the jackpot game, an effect display (effect A) congratulating that it became a jackpot game is executed, and then a notification is given that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round will be switched, and the jackpot An effect display (effect B) for notifying (suggesting) that a game for determining whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the game ends is executed. Then, an effect display (effect C) is given to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state, and the gaming state provided after the jackpot game ends at the end of the jackpot game (high or low jackpot probability, presence / absence of electric support) The effect display (effect D) for notifying (suggesting) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the production B and the production C described above are switched is different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b closes (timing at which the fourth round ends). By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the various processes performed with the pachinko machine 10 concentrate.

  Further, the timing at which the production B and the production C are switched is between the timing when the upper attacker 650b is closed (timing when the fourth round is finished) and the timing when the lower attacker 65f1 is opened (timing when the fifth round is started). Since the interval period (specific interval period t4) is set, the game ball of the current jackpot game has the probability change switch 65e3 set based on the timing at which the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a passable jackpot, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the tiredness to the game by grasping the result of the jackpot game at an early stage.

  It should be noted that a plurality of timings for switching the effect display are prepared within the specific interval period t4, and a means for setting the timing for switching the effect display at random is provided, so that the jackpot game can be further increased based on the timing for switching the effect display. It can be difficult to grasp the result.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the location same as the content of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 demonstrated in 1st Embodiment mentioned above, although description to the display screen or the description is abbreviate | omitted, it is the same also in this embodiment. It has a display.

  First, in the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state ST1, the stage where the main character is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen (not shown). When the jackpot is won and the game proceeds to the probability variation gaming state ST3, a display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the probability-changing gaming state ST3.

  In the display screen of FIG. 68 (a), the variation of the first special symbol is displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the screen. At the bottom of the screen, there is provided a game state display area in which “tower search mode (probability game state ST3)” that is the current game mode (game state) and “right-handed” for notifying the game method are displayed. Also, on the right side of the screen, a status display area is provided in which an object simulating a tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this state display area, “1F” which is the lowest floor of the object, “100F” which is the top floor, “rooftop” which is above the top floor, and “30F” which indicates the current floor number are displayed. Has been.

  During the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the display is updated every time the special symbol changes once so that the tower goes up one floor and the special symbol changes 100 times without winning a big hit so that it reaches the rooftop. In other words, the number of floors (“30F” in the figure) displayed with the cursor as “current floor” is the same value as the current number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot. With the display of this status display area, the special character is changed 100 times without winning a jackpot during the probable game state ST3, and the main character ascends the tower and finally moves to the latent probabilistic game state ST2. It is comprised so that it may display as an effect which reaches | attains.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), a description will be given of the display contents when winning a jackpot during the probability variation gaming state ST3. FIG. 68B is a diagram illustrating a display screen indicating that the jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as “555”, indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. The first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at “246” indicating that the first special symbol is off. In the status display area, “50F” is shown as the current floor number (the number of special symbol changes since the end of the previous jackpot).

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, when winning the jackpot, a display body (elevator) for notifying that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, the player gets into the elevator and produces an effect of hitting the destination of the elevator (not shown). Elevator destinations include “outdoor” when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state ST1 or the short-time gaming state ST1h, and “tower search mode (tower) when the probability changing gaming state ST3 is set. 1F) ”and“ roof mode ”(see FIG. 69) when set to the latent probability changing game state ST2, each of which is configured to indicate the destination by the effect executed during the jackpot game. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, so the jackpot game is started before the jackpot game or at the beginning of the jackpot game. The gaming state set after the game is not finalized.

  Therefore, based on the winning jackpot type (A to H), the gaming state that shifts when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 and the gaming state that shifts when the gaming ball does not pass are determined (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of jackpot E, the gaming state to be transferred after the jackpot game ends is a probabilistic gaming state ST3 or a short-time gaming state ST1h), and an effect common to the determination result is used as a jackpot game opening stage effect (for example, effect A in FIG. 67). After that, it is preferable to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and to set the effect of the end game (for example, the effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the effect on the display screen without a sense of incongruity with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3).

  FIG. 69 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the game state display area includes a right-handed display and a current game mode (game state). A certain “roof mode (latent probability change game state ST2)” is displayed. In the situation display area, the “rooftop” display is highlighted in order to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

  This “roof mode” is a mode for notifying (suggesting) the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the present pachinko machine 10, various values are set so that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to get a ball is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 80. In the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the actual variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special diagram 2 is set short. In addition, the small hit game time (the opening period and the ending time in which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening among the small hit game time) is also set short (shorter than the probability variation game state ST3). In other words, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set to the game state having the longest time in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

  The “rooftop mode” suggesting the latent probability change gaming state ST2 is won by jackpot F during probability change gaming state ST3 (10% of the total jackpot), or without winning a jackpot during probability change gaming state ST3, It is designed to shift by changing the special symbol 100 times.

  At that time, as an effect display performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, a win is won in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (FIG. 68 (b)), and an effect (not shown) of getting into the elevator is started. Then, during the jackpot game, is the elevator rising upstairs or downstairs? After performing such an effect and informing (suggesting) which mode the player should enter after the jackpot game is finished, an effect display in which the elevator reaches the roof is executed.

  In addition, when the game shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2 without winning a jackpot during the probability change game state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times. The current number of floors indicated in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to “roof mode”, the cursor shown in the status display area shifts from “100F” to “roof” and shifts to “roof mode”.

  Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the “roof mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability changing game state ST2. FIG. 70B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the right-handed display and the current game mode (game) are displayed in the game state display area. "Roof Mode (Hidden Probability Changing Game State ST2)" is displayed. In the situation display area, the “rooftop” display is highlighted in order to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

  In addition, “possession G (acquired medium display)” is displayed on the upper side of the display screen as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. In the center of the display screen, a plurality of treasure chests are displayed on the roof of the tower. This treasure chest is displayed so that it is opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

  The acquired medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is a display corresponding to the game ball acquired in a series of game flows (flow from initial big hit to normal game state ST1) in the pachinko machine 10. Is.

  In the present embodiment, as the acquired medium display, a value corresponding to the total number of mediums acquired during a series of games is displayed. For example, in the series of games, it corresponds to a medium acquired by a big hit game. The value and the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode that allows the player to identify the value. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. When such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (value corresponding to the medium that can be acquired in one big hit game), another display is performed. The display mode may be displayed. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the medium equivalent to the big hit game can be obtained as a result of the multiple hit games.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at “123” indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol that was changing at the same timing as the stop of the change of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the disengagement. In the center of the display screen, the selected treasure box is opened, and an effect is displayed in which a treasure indicating a small hit appears from the inside.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when a big win is won with the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2. When a big win is won with the second special symbol, one of the treasure boxes displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70 (a) is opened during the change, and an effect in which a monster appears is displayed. Then, during the jackpot, a battle with the monster starts and an effect is displayed so that the game state after the jackpot game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle (not shown). For example, if you win the battle, you will reach the rooftop and go to “Rooftop Mode”. In addition, when it escapes from the battle, it shifts to the “tower search mode (1F)”, and when it loses the battle, an effect is displayed to shift to the “outdoor” stage (not shown).

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment, the effect that the story progresses is displayed for each mode corresponding to the gaming state, and the story is displayed according to the special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit). The result is configured to change. Since the player can grasp whether or not the current state is advantageous to the player only by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the gameability (complexity more than the conventional pachinko machine 10 ( There is an effect that a player can play a game without being confused even if a gameability that can acquire many game balls in addition to the jackpot game is adopted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the content of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Note that the difference in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Since other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment operates the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric accessory (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in the first embodiment. The point that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added is different from the point that the values of various counter values referenced in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first random number table 202a is different from the first embodiment in that the value set as the jackpot determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the condition for determining the small hit is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second random number table 202c is different in that the value set as the winning determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is that the jackpot type is increased with respect to the first embodiment, and the jackpot type selection used for the short-time gaming state ST1h can be selected. The difference is that a table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e and the normal pattern variation pattern selection table are different from the first embodiment in that the set variation time is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

  The small hitting type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hitting random number table 202b is stabilized as small hitting, and is a table for selecting the small hitting type corresponding to each gaming state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special electric accessory operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric accessory corresponding to the set jackpot type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario that is selected when a jackpot is made, and stores the timing and the number of times of the action of the accessory during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86).

  FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operation table. The point that 202h is added is different from the point that the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (storing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85), and in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82). A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 when the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2, and the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86) is updated. Will be cleared at the same time as the jackpot scenario is reset

  The other memory area 203z includes other memory areas set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and includes at least the number-of-entrance counter 203j and the operation counter 203k described in the first embodiment. A notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, and a remaining ball timer 203o are included, and are used in the same control as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 199. In the low probability gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7”, a high probability In the gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7 to 9”, it is determined that it is the first winning (big hit). That is, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is “1/200”, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is “3/200”. The first lottery game based on the first special symbol and the second lottery game based on the second special symbol used in this embodiment are both determined using the first random number table 202a.

  With reference to FIG. 73 (b), the contents of the small hit random number table 202b will be described. FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202b. In this embodiment, there is no win in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “10” in the low probability game state (low probability: no electric support, low probability: electric support). If it is ˜20 ”, it is determined that it is a small hit, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is“ 10 to 199 ”in the high probability gaming state (high probability: no electric support, high probability: electric support). If there is a small hit, it is determined. That is, the probability of winning by the first lottery game is “0/200”, the probability of winning by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is “11/200”, and the second lottery game in the high probability game state. The probability of hitting by is “190/200”.

  Thereby, in the high-probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 and probability variation gaming state ST3) in which the second lottery game is performed, a small hit game is frequently given. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b). In the latent probability changing game state ST2 and the probability changing game state ST3, the time for the second specific winning opening 650 to be open as a small hit game is the same, The opening time and the ending time set as the small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter in the small hit game in the latent probability changing game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning port 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that a player can acquire as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability change game state ST2 than the probability change game state ST3, and the player can acquire game balls other than the jackpot game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a surprising surprise and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%. However, for example, it may be set to about 10%, or the second lottery in the low probability game state. Although the probability of winning a small hit in the game is set to “11/200”, for example, it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in the high probability gaming state.

  The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second per-random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the low-probability gaming state, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is “0 to 98”. ", In the high-probability gaming state, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is" 0 to 99 ", it is determined that the second hit (per normal). That is, the probability of winning in the low probability gaming state is “99/100”, and the probability of winning in the high probability gaming state is “100/100”. In addition, when the winning is won per the usual figure, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is operated, and the game ball enters the second start port 640 easily (special state). In the present embodiment, although the slight probability difference between the high probability and the low probability is provided for the second hit, the same probability may be used.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal gaming state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a jackpot type referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically selection table B202d. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referred to in the short-time gaming state ST1h. This is a type selection table D202d.

  This jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when a jackpot is won as a lottery result of each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and the type of special symbol (first 1 special symbol (Special Fig. 1) or 2nd special symbol (Special Fig. 2)) and based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type is jackpoted using the counter value obtained from the first hit type counter C2 One of A to jackpot H is selected.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the short-time gaming state ST1h is added and the jackpot type to be selected is The difference between the increased point, the point where the jackpot game interval time can be set according to the jackpot type, and the ratio of the first hit type counter value that is distributed to each jackpot type is different. Other configurations Are the same. The description of the same part is omitted, and the difference is described.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the big win is won in the special game 1 in the normal game state ST1, the ratio that the gaming state after the big winning game ends becomes a high probability gaming state (high probability) is as follows. At 50%, the interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and the V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) are set for each jackpot type so that the ratio of low probability state (low probability) is 50%. The presence / absence of electric support after the end of the jackpot game is set. More specifically, according to the gaming state, the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 as a V action (the ball is allowed to enter), and the opening pattern (V is acceptable) for controlling the operation of the switching member 65h, and the game ball is the probability change switch 65e3. One of the opening patterns (V impossibility) for controlling the operation of the switching member 65h is set such that the passage (entrance) is impossible (difficult).

  Furthermore, if the V action is V possible according to the gaming state as the interval time, the game ball is placed in the first variable winning device 65 in the period during which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. Even if “4 seconds (V acceptable)” that allows a prize to be entered in the specific winning opening 65a and the V action is V possible, the game ball is placed in the probability change switch 65e3 during the period in which the game ball can pass (enter). Any one of “1 second (V impossible)” that is impossible (difficult) to win is set in the first specific winning port 65 of the 1 variable winning device 65.

  And it is set whether electric support (100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot game. Note that the electric support is given regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enters) the probability change switch 65e3. When the jackpot type for which “present” is set is selected, when the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 (enters), the game ball shifts to the probability change game state (ST3) after the jackpot game ends, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability change switch 65e3. If it does not pass (enter), it will shift to the short-time gaming state (ST1h) after the jackpot game ends.

  In this manner, the current jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types set with different contents according to the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot is won in FIG. 1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the jackpot type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state ST3 is provided after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot H are set as jackpot types for which the normal gaming state ST is selected after the jackpot game ends. This means that even if “1 second” or “4 seconds” is selected as the interval time, and “V acceptable” or “V impossible” is selected as the V action, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state ST1 after the big hit game ends. It shows that there is sex. By configuring in this way, it becomes impossible to grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game only by grasping the contents of the interval time and the V action (becomes difficult). Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (suggestion) of the game state after the jackpot game is finished during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the jackpot game is finished). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where the player gets interested in the displayed effect and gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, the distribution in which the V action is “V OK” or “V NO” only differs depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the rate at which the V action becomes “V acceptable” is set to 90% and the rate at which “V impossible” is set to 10%. In the second special symbol, the V action is set to “V acceptable”. "Is set to 100% and the ratio of" V not possible "is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V action (the action of the switching member 65h) depending on the gaming state, so that the capacity for storing the action instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) is reduced. Can be (two types). There is an effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol will be described. In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method advantageous to the player, but when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the normal game state A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. An inappropriate game is to reset the RAM of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set in the normal gaming state ST1. By receiving a plurality of lotteries in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2 that is most advantageous to the player without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Action can be considered. Assuming the case where such a game is performed, when the big hit is won with the second special symbol during the normal gaming state ST1, the big hit H is selected. The jackpot H is a jackpot type that shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 after the jackpot game ends.

  Therefore, it becomes possible to give a penalty to a player who plays an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. In addition, as for the penalty (penalty) to be executed against an inappropriate player, the contents other than those described above may be used. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the second special symbol that is not subject to substantial variation is won in a small win. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hit game may be set to a special variation pattern so that at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is long variation is forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it is difficult to continue the game substantially, and it is possible to suppress the inappropriate game from being continuously executed.

  Also, if you win a jackpot as a result of improper gaming, the operation details of the special electric accessory during the jackpot game will be changed to the special operation details (the operation where the game ball cannot enter the specific winning opening (difficult) Content) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main controller 110.

  Note that, for example, when the jackpot is won in the state where the second special symbol is held, and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game ends, the above-described inappropriate game is performed without the player's intention. In some cases, the game may be executed only after a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends (the number of the second special symbol upper limit storage number (4)), or during the normal game state ST1, the second start port 640. It may be executed only when winning. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) the penalty for an inappropriate game from a player who is playing a normal game, and to give a dissatisfaction to the player. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is as follows. At 10%, the ratio of low probability state (low probability) is set to 90%. This is because the game shown in FIG. 1 in the probability variation game state ST3 is an inappropriate game like the game shown in FIG. 2 in the normal game state ST1, so that a penalty is imposed on the player. On the other hand, if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) is 70%, the percentage of low probability state (low probability) is 30%. It is set to become.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability changing game state ST2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in this embodiment, when the big win is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the ratio that the gaming state after the big winning game ends becomes a high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to be 30%, and the rate of low probability (low probability) is 70%. This is because the game shown in FIG. 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the game shown in FIG. 2 in the normal game state ST1, so that a penalty is imposed on the player. On the other hand, if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is the high probability gaming state (high probability) is 90%, and the percentage of the low probability state (low probability) is 10%. It is set to become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the short time gaming state ST1h will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the short-time gaming state ST1h, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability gaming state (high probability) is as follows. At 95%, the ratio of low probability (low probability) is set to 5%. On the other hand, if the big win is won in Special Figure 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the big jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) is 5%, the percentage of low probability state (low probability) is 95% It is set to become. This is because the game of the special figure 2 in the short-time game state ST1h is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, so that a penalty (penalty) is given to the player.

  In this way, if the big win is won in the special figure 1 during the short-time gaming state ST1h, even if the same low probability state, the gaming state after the big hit game has a high probability with a higher probability than the normal gaming state ST1. It is set to be able to enter the gaming state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to a low probability state (falls), it is possible to provide a chance to move to a high probability game state (retraction chance) for a predetermined period. There is an effect that the motivation of the game can be enhanced for the person.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the transition ratio to the high probability gaming state can be set according to the gaming state and the type of special symbol, a wider variety of gaming characteristics than conventional pachinko machines are provided. It becomes possible to provide, and the effect that the situation where a player gets tired early can be suppressed. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has played an inappropriate game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern in each gaming state will be described. This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the variation time set for each variation pattern is different. Description of the same parts is omitted, and only the differences are described.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal gaming state ST1. The normal game state ST1 is different from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time of FIG. 2 is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, so the variation time is set short.

  FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table B referred to in the short-time gaming state ST1h. In the short-time gaming state ST1h, as in the normal gaming state ST1, the above-described points are that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes) and that the fluctuation time of the various deviation fluctuation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. This is different from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, unlike FIG. 1, the special figure 2 is the subject of substantial fluctuation, so the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600000 ms (10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is changed to 500 ms. It is different from the first embodiment described above in that it has been changed.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. The probability variation gaming state ST3 is different from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes).

  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a general pattern variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation time of a normal symbol. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the number of normal symbols is one, and therefore the difference is that the number of normal symbols referring to this table is one.

  FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80 (a) is a small hit type selection table 202g used when the special symbol game is determined to be a small hit, so that a predetermined small hit according to the gaming state is selected. Is set. If the game state is won in the small hits during the normal gaming state ST1 or the short-time gaming state ST1h, the small hit 1 is selected, and if the small hits are won in the probability change gaming state ST3, the small hit 2 is selected. If the player wins a small hit during the game state ST2, 3 is selected. Note that the operation contents of the special electric accessory during the small hit game are different for the small hit 1, the small hit 2, and the small hit 3, respectively. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (b), the operation contents of the special electric combination (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) operated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 80B is a diagram schematically showing the special electric accessory operating table 202h. The operation details of the special electric accessory corresponding to the jackpot type are set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

  First, the operation content of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot type jackpot A to jackpot E, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second variable winning device from 1 round (R) to 4 rounds as the opening action during the round 650 (upper) is opened for 29 seconds, and in the fifth round, the first variable winning device 65 (lower) is opened for 29 seconds. From the 6th round to the 7th round, the second variable winning device 650 (upper) is set to be opened again for 29 seconds. Note that the opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, but during this period, the game is set so that the specific winning opening is closed when 10 game balls win the specific winning opening of each variable winning device. Then, 2 seconds are set as the interval between rounds, 1 second is set as the specific interval between rounds (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds are set as the ending time.

  The jackpot types E to H differ from the jackpots A to E described above in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and other items are set to the same value. . In this way, by changing the specific interval between rounds, as described with reference to FIG. 67, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass to the probability change switch 65e3 (easy or difficult). Yes. In this way, between specific rounds (a round in which a game ball is awarded to the second specific prize opening 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 and a round in which a game ball is awarded to the first specific prize opening 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65) The ratio of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3 can be set by simply changing the interval time between the two), providing the player with various games, There is an effect that interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the ball guide path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guide path 72, may be switched. Moreover, you may comprise so that the value of V effective period t6 may be changed by changing the value of V open | release period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the 1 specific winning opening 65a is open, the period to be changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guidance path passing time, the right game starts when the jackpot game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the sum of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball that is hit right by the start of the big hit game is the first within the V effective period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. Other configurations may be adopted. For example, you may comprise so that the operation content of the switching member 65h can also be set with the special electric accessory operation | movement table 202h.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one jackpot game. However, in the one jackpot game, The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be in the open state in the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round.

  By configuring in this way, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state can be changed to the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, and during a single jackpot game It becomes possible to have a plurality (three) of specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can reach the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 at a timing at which the game ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3. There is an effect that the player can be expected multiple times during one big hit game.

  When the above-described configuration is adopted, if the V operation is V possible (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened and the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. If it is determined whether or not the game ball is being fired at a timing that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and if the game ball is not being fired at a time that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the player is given an appropriate game method. It is good to inform.

  Specifically, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within the specific interval period, and the third result is determined based on the determination result. As a display for informing the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display contents explaining the game method, such as “Do not stop right-handed!” Or “Probably a chance to change if you keep firing!”. By performing such display, the game can be supported so that the player can play an appropriate game when the first variable prize-winning device 65 is next opened (5th and 7th rounds). It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

  The method for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being played during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-described content, and other methods may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball during the big hit game is operated, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the handle and determining that the right-handed game is not performed is used. May be.

  Further, the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method may be changed based on the content of the winning jackpot. For example, if an appropriate game is played, the display may be emphasized when the game ball is a big hit that passes the probability change switch 65e3.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the jackpot scenario which opens the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 65 in a continuous round can be set. By using such a configuration, even when the interval time is short, it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, further increase variations, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. There are 1 small hits to 3 small hits types. Small hits 1 are those that are selected when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the short-time gaming state ST1h. It is a small hit selected in the case of the gaming state ST3. The small hit 3 is a small hit that is selected when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (see FIG. 80A).

  Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set so that the opening time and the ending time are 7.5 seconds, and the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is set to be repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit where the high speed release is repeated, and the game ball hardly wins (difficult) in the specific winning opening during the small hit game.

  Next, for small end 2, the opening time and ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, the same as for small end 1, but the opening operation during the round is performed once for 1.8 seconds. Is set. That is, in the small hit 2, it is set so that the game ball can win a special winning opening for the operation of the special electric accessory.

  Specifically, in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 2 low hit game The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds) by adding the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (7.5 seconds). If the number of game balls to be awarded to the specific prize opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific prize opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 prize balls per minute. It becomes.

  Finally, the small hit 3 is the same as the small hit 2 during the round, but the opening time and the ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. In other words, for the small hit 2, the period in which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter.

  Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 3 of the small hit The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds) by adding the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (0.3 seconds). If the number of game balls to be awarded to the specific prize opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific prize opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls per minute. .

  That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening, and the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hit game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game can appear more frequently than the small hit two. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire a large number of game balls, and there is an effect that the interest of the game is improved. Further, by adding another gameability (game waiting for the game state to shift to the latent probability changing game state ST2) to the gameability such as waiting for the jackpot game to be executed as in the past, it is possible to give the player There is an effect that it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. 81 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Since the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223m and an advantageous information storage area 223n are added, and other configurations. Since this is the same as that of the first embodiment, its detailed description is omitted.

  The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to ON while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability gaming state, and is set to ON when the gaming state is in the high probability gaming state. It is set to OFF when a low probability gaming state is entered.

  The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (during advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period, and the number of big hits and small hits won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to OFF.

  By using the advantageous period flag 223m and the advantageous information storage area 223n described above to temporarily store the number of game balls acquired by the player during the high-probability game, the acquired medium is displayed on the display screen in the latent probability changing game state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86, control processing executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. In addition, about the process similar to 1st Embodiment, illustration and its description are abbreviate | omitted, and only illustration and description are given about different control processing.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. . About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the process of S609, after the change stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the process of S651 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric accessory operation table) defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. (S651).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different from the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1051 is added. . About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the process of S1009, after the change stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the process of S1051 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Here, in the jackpot scenario, an operation for each hour in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set. After that, when a closing condition is satisfied (for example, until 10 balls are won or the opening time of 30 seconds elapses), the specific winning opening is closed, and then, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed, the next The jackpot round is started and the opening of the special winning opening is set.

  In the second embodiment, jackpot scenarios are stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the gaming state and jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if it is a jackpot type that is set in an opening pattern that allows a game ball to enter the probability variation switch 65e3, the opening period and the interval period are set to be variable, so that the game ball is present in the probability variation switch 65e3. A jackpot that can be entered and a jackpot that is impossible to enter can be set. As a result, depending on the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to variably set the probability variation ratio for each gaming state by restricting the jackpot type that can enter the probability variation switch 65e3 by the opening time or the interval time.

  In the normal gaming state ST1 where the normal gaming method is set to play the game ball in the left channel PA1 and enter the first start port 630 to play the game ball, the right channel PA2 When a game is played with the game ball flowing down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easy to open. Therefore, when playing the game with the game ball flowing down to the left channel PA1, the first start port 630 is used. It is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 640 more easily than the game ball enters. For the player, even in the normal gaming state, it is advantageous to play the game by letting the game ball flow down to the right channel PA2, because more lottery opportunities for the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, when the big special game state is a big hit with the second special symbol, even if it is a big hit type that is released with an opening pattern that allows the player to enter the probability variation switch 65e3, it is set in the big hit scenario. Since the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a ends before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 due to the interval period, the game ball can be passed through the probability changing switch 65e3. The probability change is not given to the player, that is, the probability change ratio of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if an illegal act is performed in which the game ball is caused to flow down to the right channel PA2 in the normal game state ST1, a disadvantage on the game store side can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in each gaming state, even if a flow path (left flow path PA1, right flow path PA2) for playing a game is set by design, the probability variation rate at a winning opening entering in a different flow path is disadvantageous for the player. Can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal symbol variation process 2 (S156). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) is different from the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1214 to S1215 are deleted. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted. In addition, since the processing of S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment is deleted, in this embodiment, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is opened twice and 1 second as the number of times regardless of the gaming state. An opening pattern is set. Accordingly, the support opening pattern is always easy to win the second starting port 640, and the second starting port 640 can be set to easily win when it is opened.

  As a result, when the game state is such that the game ball is caused to flow down to the right channel PA2 (time-short game state ST1h, latent probability variation game state ST2, probability variation game state ST3), the game ball is further transferred to the second start port 640. You can win a lot. In the present embodiment, when the game ball flows down to the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win a prize at the first start port 630 than when the game ball flows down to the left flow path PA1. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by changing the second special symbol with priority, and it is possible to easily set the jackpot to the player with the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604) in the first embodiment in that the processes from S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes of S1721 to S1724. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1721, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the big hit scenario is set (S1721: Yes), the scenario counter d2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S1722). Thereafter, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1721, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this process ends. Note that data corresponding to a scenario counter is set for each jackpot scenario, and operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

  In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is data indicating the start of opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of opening (S1723: Yes), an opening command is set (S1724). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1723 that the opening is not started (S1723: No), the processing of S1624 is executed.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, since it is configured so that the start of the opening or the start timing of a new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. Can be controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1656 to S1657 is changed to the process of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, since the jackpot type is set in which the upper limit of the number of times that the normal symbol is in the short-time state is set even if the probability variation gaming state is given, the processing of S1731 (short-time counter 203t The timing of the process of setting 100 to 100 is changed and set. Further, in the final process of the ending process 2 (S1730) for setting the jackpot end process, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being played by the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, short-time gaming state ST1h, latent probability changing gaming state) When the second lottery game that is not subject to substantial variation is performed in the normal game state ST1 because a plurality of ratios for shifting to the high probability game state after the jackpot game end can be set based on ST2, the probability variation game state ST3) It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). By configuring in this way, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high probability game state). There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the special symbol type and the gaming state. For example, the jackpot type selection based on the special symbol type is selected. The selection of the interval time based on the gaming state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, a jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and an interval time corresponding to the gaming state is selected using a different table (for example, an interval time type selection table). Select. And you may make it perform jackpot control using the selected jackpot classification and interval time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and there is an effect that the capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the interval time type selection table described above, the gaming state and the interval time are associated with each other (a certain interval time is always selected in the case of a certain gaming state), but a predetermined counter (for example, an interval) A plurality of interval times may be selected based on the counter value of (time type counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gameability more complicated and to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, although this 2nd Embodiment demonstrated using the pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol is performed simultaneously, it is employ | adopted for the game machine of other types. May be. As other types of gaming machines, for example, a gaming machine of a type that executes variation in the order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won at the start opening, or the variation of one special symbol is the other special symbol. There is a type of gaming machine that is executed in preference to the fluctuation of the above.

  Further, when the game ball wins at the first start opening, a winning lottery is performed, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning opening is operated in a state where the winning can be made. When the first bonus game and the lottery result are the second result, the second bonus game that activates the second prize opening in a state where the prize can be won, and the second bonus game during the second bonus game, Used in a gaming machine (1 type 2 type mixed machine) provided with a third award game that activates the first prize opening in a state where a prize can be won by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the prize opening. May be.

  The second embodiment is configured such that the game ball passes through the ball guiding path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state. Alternatively, a game ball that has passed a specific route may pass through the ball guiding route 72. By configuring in this way, the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that has passed through a specific route other than the ball guiding route 72 wins the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65. By configuring in this way, the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  According to the second embodiment, two specific winning holes are provided in the flow path of the game ball, and the game ball that has passed through the upper (upstream) specific winning hole in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game that is configured so as to be able to reach the winning opening, and further provided with a delay guiding path that delays the flow time of the game ball between the upper (upstream) specific winning opening and the lower (downstream) specific winning opening. In the machine, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the gaming state (usually, probability change, latency, short time), the timing at which the game ball reaches the downstream specific winning opening is changed. Configure as possible.

  By configuring in this way, it is changed whether or not the game ball won in the specific winning port on the downstream side passes through the specific region (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning port. It is configured to be able to change the mode of the game state to be transferred (set) after the end of the big hit game. Without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65, it is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass V and a jackpot game that cannot pass V (is difficult). Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit game can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot (difficult) pass through) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, to provide various games for the player, and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period. The configuration may be adopted. For example, the ball guide path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guide path 72, may be switched. Moreover, you may comprise so that the value of V effective period t6 may be changed by changing the value of V open | release period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the 1 specific winning opening 65a is open, the period to be changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guidance path passing time, the right game starts when the jackpot game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the sum of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball that is hit right by the start of the big hit game is the first within the V effective period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Furthermore, when a different time can be set as the specific interval time, the jackpot game is set so that the time of a predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set to cancel the difference of the specific interval time. It is preferable that the sum of the interval times in is matched. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to unify the time used for each process performed using an interval period with a small amount of information processing during a big hit game, and to perform a stable process. There is an effect of becoming.

  In this embodiment, the sphere guide path 72 (delay guide path) is provided so that the sphere guide path passage time is a predetermined time (delayed). However, the entrance (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge section 70e) of this path ) May be provided with a detecting means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a means for determining (monitoring) that the game ball has passed within a predetermined time. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a clogged ball generated in the ball guiding path 72 or an illegal act of intentionally retaining a game ball in the guiding path using a magnet or a threaded ball. There is an effect that it becomes possible.

  The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used for the following gaming machines. . That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game includes a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and variable prizes provided on the upper side of the game board 13 from the first round to the 12th round. The device (second variable winning device 650) is opened, and the jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the game board 13 is opened from the 13th round to the 15th round. You may use for a game machine.

  By using the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a gaming machine, the game balls that have been launched are wasted. There is no and it is possible to entertain the effect during the jackpot game using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds).

  Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the game ball flows down to the ball guiding path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guide path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guide path 72 is the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

  Using the time required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65 (arrival time), an effect between rounds (an effect that tells whether the current jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) Even if the right-handed game is continued, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate (reduce) useless game balls (game balls that do not win the specific winning opening of the variable winning device despite the big hit). is there.

  In other words, if the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable winning device, it passes through the variable winning device during a specific interval time (the specific winning port of the variable winning device is closed). The game ball cannot win a specific winning opening even though it is a big hit game, and becomes a useless game ball. Also, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce useless game balls, an effect that is executed between specific rounds (an effect that says whether the current jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) The problem that an effect will become weak occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect during the jackpot game is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 that allows the game ball to flow down when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state is provided. Because the effect during the specific interval time using the time (3-4 seconds) that the game ball flows down is performed, it is possible to suppress the useless ball that occurs during the big hit, and the effect that is executed between specific rounds (this big hit There is an effect that it is possible to strengthen the effect of reverberating whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot.

  If the interval time between the specific rounds is set to be shorter than the time for the game ball to flow down the ball guiding path 72, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 will reach before the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to eliminate generation of useless game balls.

  As an effect in this case, it is conceivable that display data displayed in the ending period of 12 rounds of jackpot is diverted and displayed at a specific interval time of 15 rounds of jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data, and it is possible to make the player think that the 12th round is a big hit, and to the player when the 13th round is started. It has the effect of providing surprise and joy.

  In addition, when a detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guiding path 72 is provided and the detection means detects a game ball during a specific interval period, the current big hit is 15 round big hits (the big hit is still (Continued) may be notified. By comprising in this way, there exists an effect that the act which stops discharge | release of a game ball in the interval period during a jackpot game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined to perform the following. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and the game balls meander in the horizontal direction from the second variable winning device 650 toward the first variable winning device 65. A configuration in which a guidance route for guiding the robot is provided may be used for the following gaming machines. In other words, the first prize number (for example, 12 rounds) and the second number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the variable winning device (upstream side) provided from the first round to the 12th round ( The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side is opened and used for a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed. Also good.

  In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is in the closed state, the game ball rolls along the guide path and is guided to the downstream variable winning device. This guide route is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (a time longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. The upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device have a plurality of open patterns so that they are opened in a predetermined order during a single jackpot game. Depending on the type of jackpot Is set.

  And it is comprised so that the opening / closing state of each variable winning apparatus can be displayed on a display means. That is, the player is configured to be able to grasp the situation where the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be determined whether the closing state is an interval period (mid jackpot) or an ending period (end of jackpot).

  By using such a configuration, for example, the display means indicates that the variable winning device is closed in the interval period when the upstream variable winning device is closed and then the downstream variable winning device is opened. By displaying the effect (closing effect) on the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game has ended or will continue. Then, at the same time as the interval period ends and the downstream variable winning device is opened, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display device. At the timing when the opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guide route has not reached the downstream variable winning device (the time required to pass the guide route rather than the interval time) Because it is longer), the game ball that rolls on the guiding path is surely awarded to the downstream variable winning device while the closing effect is being executed (while the upstream variable winning device is closed). It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while executing the effect indicating the closing of the variable winning device in the jackpot game. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of types of opening patterns for each variable winning device in the jackpot game.

  Below, the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modification Example 1 of Second Embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is made different from that in the second embodiment described above, and a game property different from that in the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modification, when the big win is won in the normal gaming state ST1 and the game shifts to the probable gaming state ST3, the high is limited to a predetermined period (100 rotations) after the jackpot game ends. While maintaining the stochastic gaming state, it has a gameability (so-called two-time loop) for winning a jackpot at least twice.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set in the present modification. The first modification is different from the second embodiment described above in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, during the normal gaming state ST1, since it is the same distribution as the second embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted. Next, the jackpot distribution in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the real variation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3 or latent probability variation gaming state ST2) with a probability of 100% Migrate to Note that this probability variation gaming state ST3 is not a big win, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is terminated and the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. While staying in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (until the electric support is completed), the player plays the game while paying attention to winning the next jackpot.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the allocation is set so that the pullback jackpot for shifting to the probability changing game state ST3 is 34% and the jackpot for shifting (falling) to the short-time gaming state ST1h is 66%.

  Next, in the short-time gaming state ST1h, the allocation is set so that the pullback jackpot for shifting to the probability-changing gaming state ST3 is 75% and the jackpot for shifting (falling) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 25%. At this time, the short game state ST1h is not won, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state ST1 is shifted to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this time, the distribution is set so that the rate of transition to the probability-changing gaming state ST3, which is the high probability gaming state, is higher than the normal gaming state ST1, which is the same low probability state.

  As described above, in the first modification, once the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1) is shifted to the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3), the special symbol variation 100 after the big hit is 100. Only up to two times), and then two big hits are guaranteed while maintaining a high probability gaming state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability gaming state, and then has the purpose of winning a big hit within a predetermined period in a special symbol game performed in the high-probability gaming state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Below, the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
In the second modification, an upper limit number (110 times) is provided for the number of games (the number of fluctuations) in the high-probability gaming state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the second embodiment described above. The game is different from the above-described second embodiment. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modification, when a big win is won in the normal game state ST1 and a transition is made to the probable game state ST3, a specific period (high probability game) after a predetermined period has elapsed after the jackpot game ends. Only in the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), and the game property (so-called two-time loop) for winning the jackpot at least twice while maintaining the high probability game state. It is what it has. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set in the present modification. The second modification is different from the second embodiment described above in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, during the normal gaming state ST1, since it is the same distribution as the second embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted. Next, the jackpot distribution in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In the second modification, the high probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low probability state when the special symbol fluctuates 110 times without winning a jackpot. In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the real variation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70%, and the probability variation is low with a probability of 30%. Transition to a probability state. If the probability variation gaming state ST3 is not a big win and the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is completed and the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, after the big hit, the number of changes of the special symbol is started from the 101st rotation, and the high probability gaming state is shifted to the low probability state until the 110th rotation. It is a gaming state that is executed on. If the jackpot is won during the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state shifts to a high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3 or latent probability changing gaming state ST2) with a probability of 100%.

  Next, in the short-time gaming state ST1h, the allocation is set so that the pullback jackpot for shifting to the probability-changing gaming state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot for shifting (falling) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 10%. At this time, the short game state ST1h is not won, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state ST1 is shifted to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this time, the distribution is set so that the rate of transition to the probability-changing gaming state ST3, which is the high probability gaming state, is higher than the normal gaming state ST1, which is the same low probability state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) temporarily shifts to the high-probability game state (probability change game state ST3), and then the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number (after the big hit) Only for a specific period after the elapse of the special symbol variation (up to 100 times) (latency probability variation gaming state ST2), two big hits are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability gaming state thereafter. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability gaming state, and after that, the special symbol game performed in the high-probability gaming state is not won within the predetermined period, and after the predetermined period has elapsed. The game can be continued while having the goal of winning a jackpot during a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Below, the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
In the third modification, the ball guide path 72 provided in the right region of the front view of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above is provided with a shortened path 75 as another path, and the flowing game ball is guided to the ball. A distribution mechanism 75 a that distributes the path 72 and the shortened path 75, a path that guides the game balls that have flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable prize-winning device 65, and a path that guides the game board 13 to the front view lower side area Is different in that a distribution mechanism 75b is provided. About another structure, it is the same structure as 2nd Embodiment, The detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged view in which a right side area of the game board 13 according to the third modification is enlarged. In the present modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state are alternately distributed to the ball guiding path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be able to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise, and is configured such that a rotation range (rotation angle) is restricted by a rotation restricting member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guiding path 72 flow down the same path as in the second embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured such that the trajectory of the sphere is linear with respect to the ball guiding path 72, and at least the gaming balls distributed to the ball guiding path 72 first reach the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge from the shortened path 75, the time required for the game ball to pass through the shortened path is 2 seconds. By providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any of the paths by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13. (The game board 13 can flow down in a different order from the fired order).

  By using such a configuration, for example, when a game ball that first passes through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortening path 75 in a specific interval period, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. When the game ball that has first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guiding path 72 during the period, it becomes possible to win the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within a period during which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, so that the gamer can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 by himself / herself. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the present modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided that distributes the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65 and the path that guides the game board 13 to the lower front area of the game board 13. ing. Thereby, it is possible to distribute whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game ball on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball.

  In addition, even if a distribution mechanism in which a distribution destination is determined in a predetermined order is used as in this modification, a plurality of distributions are made before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability variation switch 65e3. Since the mechanism is distributed to a plurality of flow paths, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the launched game balls so as to be a predetermined distribution destination.

  Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down the ball guiding path 72 flows down on the first variable winning device 65, contacts the distribution mechanism 75b, and the distribution mechanism 75b rotates. It flows down toward the bottom of the game board while changing the state. Thereby, the rotation state of the distribution mechanism 75b always changes.

  In the present modification, only the game ball that has flowed down the shortening path 75 has been shown to reach the sorting mechanism 75b. However, the game ball that has flowed down the ball guiding path 72 may also reach the sorting mechanism 75b. Further, a sorting mechanism 75c (not shown) that sorts only the game balls that have flowed down the ball guiding path 72 may be separately provided. With this configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball and, for example, pass through the second variable winning device 650 that is in the closed state. To which path the game balls are distributed by using in a pachinko machine in which it is determined whether or not to win the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game balls can pass the probability changing switch 65e3 The possibility of rushing into the probable gaming state can be changed.

  In addition, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided in a path through which the game balls flow down during a right-handed game other than the big hit game, the distribution of each distribution mechanism is performed when a game that allows the game balls to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and the game result can be made random.

In this modification, a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls in three or more directions may be used. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  In this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing game balls is used as the distribution mechanism. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

  In the present modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reaches the distribution mechanism 75a, but is upstream of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second game ball). It may be configured to reach the distribution device 75a in the area before reaching the variable winning device 650. In this case, the game balls distributed in the predetermined direction by the distributing device 75a are the second variable winning device. A game ball that has flowed down toward the other side and is distributed in a direction other than a predetermined direction separately passes a specific flow path (for example, the shortened path 75 or the ball guide path 72), and the game ball that has passed the specific flow path is The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball route to the first variable winning device and the other route. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a to the direction other than the second variable winning device 650 to reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. .

  With this configuration, game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so as to be able to win. There is an effect that an unexpected game can be provided.

  It is to be noted that during the jackpot game, it is configured not to notify the player of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is opened, so that the player moves the game ball on the game board. And there is an effect that the game can be enjoyed while watching the open / close state of each variable winning device.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (2-loop configuration)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having at least a first award game and a second award game that is different from the first award game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second privilege state is set after execution of the second privilege game, and the first privilege game is executed when the second privilege state is set and the first privilege game is executed. The first advantageous state is set after the game is executed. Gaming machine A1, wherein is.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, at least a first bonus game that gives a bonus advantageous to the player and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game are executed by the bonus game executing means. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the second privilege game is executed. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. Thereby, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that a state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of bonus games are executed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. When a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state can be set, and the third privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific state is set after the third privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The state setting means sets a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the third privilege game is executed. Thereby, in the second advantageous state, the specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuing state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling nature of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect the privilege game to be executed.

  In either the gaming machine A1 or A4, a start condition determining means capable of determining whether a first start condition and a second start condition different from the first start condition are established, and the start condition determining means And a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the special game executing means is configured to perform a specific lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5, which executes the privilege game based on the determination that the result is established.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine A1 or A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the start condition determining means determines whether the first start condition and the second start condition different from the first start condition are satisfied. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the fact that the start condition determining means determines that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that a specific lottery result has been established, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. This makes it possible for the player to expect the first start condition and the second start condition to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the gaming machine A5 has a regulation means for regulating establishment of the second start condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the establishment of the second start condition is regulated by the regulating means, so that the player There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, a first identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the first start condition and a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the second start condition. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the two identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information simultaneously. A gaming machine A6 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are respectively displayed by the dynamic display means. Dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A7 has release means for releasing the restriction by the restriction means based on the specific advantageous state being set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the restriction by the regulating means is released by the releasing means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that a specific advantageous state is set.

  A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. And a control means for facilitating setting of the advantageous state by the setting means when the privilege game is executed next based on the advantageous state being set by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine A8, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means when the advantageous game is executed next time. It is possible to set it continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantageous and unfavorable and prevent unfavorable side)
The first lottery game is performed based on the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entrance into the first entrance. And a lottery game executing means for executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is advantageous over the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means A gaming machine B1 having suppression means for suppressing execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means based on the fact that the player has entered a second entrance different from the first entrance. Switching between a first state in which the second lottery game is disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity It is done. Execution of a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means is suppressed by the suppression means. As a result, the disadvantageous lottery game is prevented from being executed by the suppression means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that causes a significant disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determining means has a longer dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a lottery game switched adversely by the switching means than a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a lottery game switched advantageously. A gaming machine B2 that makes it easy to determine a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Further, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is respectively determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is advantageously switched to the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is determined dynamically. It is easy to determine by means. Thereby, it can suppress that the game switched disadvantageously is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can discriminate a game that is advantageously set.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player, The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball launched from the launching unit can enter when the player performs the same operation on the adjusting unit. A gaming machine B3, which is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The launching force of the game ball fired by the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the player's operation. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where game balls launched from the launching unit can enter when the player performs the same operation on the adjusting unit. Thereby, the player can execute a lottery game advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player, The privilege granting means is set such that a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to a player is set higher when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A gaming machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game as compared to the first lottery game, a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to the player is set higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous for the player, a more advantageous state can be set for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that one of them is given and the switching means switches to the second state on the basis of the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, as the privilege, either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Based on the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first lottery game or the second lottery game is the bonus given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting unit until a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that a ratio at which a set privilege set so as to easily become a specific lottery result is set higher than a privilege for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or until the specific condition is satisfied. Since the ratio at which the set privilege is set such that the second lottery game is likely to become the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game, the second lottery game is executed. This has the effect of improving the player's expectations.

  In the gaming machine B6, the gaming machine is configured such that at least the set bonus is given to the bonus given to the second lottery game by the bonus granting means. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is provided to the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which game balls can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance opening are connected to the first flow path. A gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entrance is arranged in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, Since it is arrange | positioned at 2 flow paths, there exists an effect that the state which performs only a 1st lottery game can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppression unit notifies information indicating that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the restraining means confirms that a disadvantageous lottery game is executed when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the lottery game executing means is configured to be capable of executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are executed simultaneously by the lottery game executing means, so that the game can be performed efficiently. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature C group> (Electric Chu configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entrance into the first entrance. And a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the game ball having entered the second entrance, and the first entrance to the first entrance Variable means that can be varied between a first state that restricts entry and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state, determination means that executes determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and determination And a variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means, and based on establishment of a predetermined condition, And a restricting means for restricting entry or restricting execution of the second lottery. Tricks machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The variable means changes between a first state that restricts entry into the first entry port and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state. The variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the restriction means restricts the entrance to the second entrance and the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, a state advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous state can be set by the regulating means. Therefore, there is an effect that a change in interest can be given to the player and the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance, and the variable means enters the second entrance by the variable means when the variable means is in the second state. It is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path of the ball, and the restricting means sets the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second incoming ball A gaming machine C2 that restricts entry into the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is disposed so as to prevent the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second entrance by the variable means. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the entry into the second entrance is restricted by the restriction means. Thereby, the entrance to the 2nd entrance can be controlled with easy composition. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the game machine C1 or C2 includes a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance is defined by the first flow path. And the second flow path, and the variable means is disposed at the first entrance opening disposed in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged at the first entrance opening arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that it is possible to easily configure the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the first entrance opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the means, and the restricting means The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that execution of the second lottery is restricted by making it easy to determine a long dynamic display period as a target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. By making the dynamic display period long as the dynamic display period for the second identification information easy to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is restricted by the restricting means. Therefore, there is an effect that execution can be restricted to the second lottery with an easy configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuously up configuration)
Based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance, A lottery means for executing a second lottery that is advantageous to the player over the first lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means; Dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display determining means A dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period. Setting means capable of setting a state and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in a specific stop display mode When displayed, as a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and a privilege given to the player by the privilege granting means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery A privilege determining means for determining at least one of the first privilege and the second privilege that is less granted than the first privilege, and either the first identification information or the second identification information. When one is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. Stop display And when the long state is set by the setting means, the setting means for easily determining the second privilege by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Game machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball having entered the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that is less privileged than the first privilege are given. Either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means has a specific gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. On the condition, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On the condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means by the privilege determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect more to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a setting unit that sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege granting unit, and the advantageous state is set by the setting unit. Based on this, the gaming machine D3 includes a control unit that makes it easy to set the advantageous state by the setting unit even when the privilege is given next.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege granting means, an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege granting means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state is easily set by the setting means even when the privilege is next given by the control means. It is easy to set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic E group> (Set non-priority probability change ratio low)
A first variable entrance means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable entrance means Based on the fact that the second variable entry means arranged in the second variable entry means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable entry means can enter, and that the game ball has passed through the specific area A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine E1 in which at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, lottery of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means, the player is interested in the variable pattern. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, based on a player's operation, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launch means, and the first entrance means Second entry means different from the first entry means, entry assistance means for allowing a game ball to enter the second entry means more easily than the first entry means, and the first entry means First discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the game ball having entered the game, and second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the game ball having entered the second ball entering means. And the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means simultaneously Display means capable of being displayed, and the first identification information or the specific first determination result When the second identification information indicating the specific second discrimination result is displayed, a bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, and a game ball is inserted into the second pitching means to play a game. A game state in which one of a first state set to allow the game and a second state set not to allow the second ball entry means to enter the game ball and play the game is set. When the first determination state is set by the setting means and when the first state is set by the game state setting means, and when the specific second determination result is obtained, the determination means The gaming machine E2 is characterized by comprising ratio variable means for varying the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set when the first state is set by the gaming state setting means and when the second state is set. Since the ratio is varied by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the game is entered in the second entry means in the second state. Even if fraud is done, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when fraud in the second state is performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. A gaming machine E4 having a second flow path that allows a game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the entrance rate of the first entrance means and the second entrance means varies depending on the flow path. It is possible to change the game by the flow path, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means is inserted between the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means. Guiding means for guiding to a variable pitching means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second variable pitching means is changed to the opened state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the disadvantageous pattern can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to enter the second variable entry means. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Advantageous design disadvantageous design can be changed in the opening period)
A first variable means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can pass and a closed state in which it is more difficult to pass the game ball than in the open state; and a first variable means disposed downstream of the first variable means, 1 a second variable entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the variable means to enter; a specific area in which a game ball entered into the second variable entry means can enter; and the game ball in the specific area The first variable means and the second variable entrance ball as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition, and a bonus granting means that grants a bonus advantageous to the player based on passing. Variable control means for changing the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and determined by the determination means The variable pattern includes the first When the variable means is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means can enter the specific area, and can enter the specific area rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that at least an unfavorable disadvantage pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, lottery of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable pitching means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and the first entrance means Different second entrance means, first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the game balls entering the first entrance means, and game balls entering the second entrance means Based on the ball, the second discrimination means for performing the second discrimination, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means Display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result; When the second identification information indicating the second identification information is displayed on the display means, A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game, and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. And a ratio setting means for variably setting the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set and the ratio at which the disadvantageous pattern is set in correspondence with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the ratio of setting the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is variable. There is an effect that the interest degree of the privilege given to the player can be varied to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a first probability as a probability that the first determination unit or the second determination unit determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and the first probability Probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine F3 to play.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball can be placed in the specific area even while the bonus game is being executed. By giving interest to whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set such that at least a period from the start of the privilege game to the first variable means being in the open state is different. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the player determines the start of the privilege game at the timing when the first variable means is released. Can be difficult for the player to identify, and even a disadvantageous pattern can be expected to enter a specific area.

  In the gaming machine F4, the gaming machine F4 includes guidance means for guiding the game ball that has passed through the first variable means to the second variable entry means for a predetermined period or longer, and the disadvantageous pattern includes the first variable entry means The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second variable pitching means is at least set so as to be changed from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be more reliably suppressed from passing through the specific area with a disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic G group> (Advantageous design disadvantageous design can be changed by interval period)
A first variable entrance means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable entrance means Based on the fact that the second variable entry means arranged in the second variable entry means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable entry means can enter, and that the game ball has passed through the specific area A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine G1 in which a pattern is set at least.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, lottery of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the player is interested in the variable pattern. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern have at least a period of time from when the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable pitching means is changed to the open state. A gaming machine G2 that is set differently.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is the second variable ball entry. Guiding means for guiding to the means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is the second variable in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area with a disadvantageous pattern.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first launching means capable of entering a game ball launched into the launching means, and a first A second entering means different from the first entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment based on a game ball entering the first entering means, and the second entering means. A second discriminating unit for executing a second discriminating based on the game ball having entered the ball, a first identification information indicating a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discriminating unit, and the second discrimination. Display means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means A bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, and a gaming state thereof A gaming machine G4, characterized by comprising ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern corresponding to the gaming state set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set corresponding to the gaming state. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of expectation for the game ball entering the specific area can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, a first probability that is determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit, and a first probability that is higher than the first probability Probability setting means capable of setting either one of two probabilities is provided, and at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means for the privilege given by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area. By making the player interested in whether or not the game ball can be passed through, there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game can be suppressed.

<Feature H group> (New Zero Attacker)
Condition determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied, and an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the fact that the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means A first variable ball entry means that is variable to the second variable ball entry means, a second variable ball entry means that is arranged in parallel with the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the ball has entered, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the fact that the establishment of the specific condition is determined, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for varying the pitching means in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is established in the open state; the first variable pitching means; and the second variable pitching means. Between the first variable pitching means and the closure If the on purpose made, the gaming machine and wherein the time-to-game ball reaches the second variable ball entrance means those having a guide means for more than a predetermined period H1.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, lottery of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and the flow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using two variable winning devices, and further gaming There was a need for improvement of interest. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable pitching means is closed, the period until the second variable pitching means is reached by the guiding means is set to a predetermined period or longer. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball entry means before the ball entry means is opened, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means includes an opening effect indicating the open state when the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means is in the open state, and the first variable When the ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are each in a closed state, there is an effect execution means for executing at least a closing effect indicating a closed state, and the closing effect is within the predetermined period. A gaming machine H2 that is executed in the above.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that it is in the closed state using a predetermined period, and therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the one special game is executed by the special game execution means, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are each changed to the open state. The game machine H3 is characterized by having an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern for which the number is set from a plurality of opening patterns.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since it is determined from a plurality of opening patterns, the opening pattern can be made random and the game can be varied.

  In the gaming machine H3, the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining unit is set in advance with a timing for changing the first variable ball entering unit or the second variable ball entering unit from the closed state to the open state. A gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H3, the timing for changing from the closed state to the open state is set in the open pattern in advance, so the first variable ball entry means and the second variable input by the open pattern. It is possible to stabilize the number of game balls that enter the ball means and to set the profit given to the player based on the design value.

<Feature I group> (Loop twice only for a predetermined period after the jackpot)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having at least a first award game and a second award game that is different from the first award game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second privilege state is set after execution of the second privilege game, and the first privilege game is executed when the second privilege state is set and the first privilege game is executed. After the game is executed, the first advantageous state is set and After the first advantageous state is set, the second advantageous state is set when a specific condition is satisfied without the first privilege game or the second privilege game being executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine I1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, and the probability of a jackpot based on the lottery result is There are those that give a high probability game with a high probability. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which high-probability gaming is continued until the jackpot is won twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once a high-probability game is started, it is promised that the high-probability game will be continued and the player will win twice, so after the high-probability game is started, the player There was a problem of getting bored with games. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's tiredness.

  According to the gaming machine I1, at least the first advantageous state advantageous to the player and the second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, at least a first bonus game that gives a bonus advantageous to the player and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game are executed by the bonus game executing means. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the second privilege game is executed. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, when the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. Thereby, when the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is established in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set thereafter, so that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of bonus games are executed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous state can be set, and the third privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the specific state is set after the third privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The state setting means sets a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the third privilege game is executed. Thereby, in the second advantageous state, the specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuing state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling nature of the game becomes too high.

  The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the predetermined condition is met when the discrimination result by the discrimination unit is a specific discrimination result. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1 or I2, determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and predetermined when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. Therefore, the player can play a game with an interest in the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times. A game is played while expecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In either the gaming machine I3 or I4, a probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability determined as the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability higher than the first probability. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, the following effects are produced. That is, at least one of the first probability determined as a specific determination result by the determination unit and the second probability higher than the first probability is set by the probability setting unit. In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the second probability is set by the probability setting means. As a result, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics J group> (Award distribution structure to attackers)
Condition determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied, and an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the fact that the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means A first variable pitching means that is variable, a second variable pitching means disposed downstream of the first variable pitching means, and the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and based on the fact that the specific condition has been established, the first variable pitching means and the second A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for changing the variable pitching means in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is established in the open state; the first variable pitching means; and the first variable pitching means. Distribute at least gaming balls to the downstream side of the ball means The first distribution means, and the game balls distributed by the first distribution means to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means are disposed on the second variable ball input means and the downstream side of the second variable ball input means. A gaming machine J1 having at least second distribution means for distribution.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is a jackpot, There is a game that provides a big hit game in which a game ball enters a big winning opening provided on the board. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which two large winning holes are provided on the gaming board surface (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, there was a problem that the game balls that did not enter one of the big winning entrances did not enter the other big winning entrance, and the flow of game balls on the game board surface was poor. . The gaming machine J1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a gaming ball that makes a player expect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball can be released from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the game ball. The first variable pitching means is varied according to the state. The second variable ball entry means is disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, the privilege granting means gives a privilege advantageous to the player. Based on the determination that the specific condition is established, the privilege game executing means opens the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means in an open state until a predetermined condition is established in a predetermined order. Execute a bonus game that can be varied. The first distribution means distributes at least the game balls to the first variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the first variable ball input means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball input means are The distribution means distributes at least the second variable entry means and the downstream side of the second variable entry means. Thereby, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable entry means to enter the second variable entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a flow of game balls that makes a player expect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include a rotation unit that can rotate in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and the rotation unit. The game machine J2 is characterized by having at least a restricting means for restricting the rotation range at a predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are moved in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction by the rotating portion. It is possible to rotate, and the restricting means restricts the rotation range of the rotating part at a predetermined angle. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate sorting operation and to improve the fun of the game. .

  In the gaming machine J2, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. A gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing down game balls. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate sorting operation.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable pitching means is in the closed state, the guiding means for guiding the gaming ball to the second variable pitching means, and the gaming ball is When the second variable pitching means is guided to the second variable pitching means, it has a guide path for guiding the guided game ball to the second sorting means when the second variable pitching means is in a closed state. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first variable pitching means is closed, the game ball is guided to the second variable pitching means by the guiding means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable pitching means by the guiding means, and the second variable pitching means is in a closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second sorting means. And a taxiway. Thereby, the rotation state of the 2nd distribution means can be changed. Therefore, the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member can be made complicated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Probability rate of one symbol is normally regulated by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable entrance means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable entrance means Based on the fact that the second variable entry means arranged in the second variable entry means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable entry means can enter, and that the game ball has passed through the specific area A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine K1 in which at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, lottery of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the player is interested in the variable pattern. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, based on a player's operation, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launch means, and the first entrance means Second entry means different from the first entry means, entry assistance means for allowing a game ball to enter the second entry means more easily than the first entry means, and the first entry means First discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the game ball having entered the game, and second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the game ball having entered the second ball entering means. And first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, respectively. Display means, and either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is predetermined. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the priority order, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result. A first state that is set to allow the game to be executed by allowing the second ball entry means to enter the game ball when the game is displayed; A game state setting means for setting one of a second state that is set so as not to allow a game ball to enter the two ball entry means, and the first state is set by the game state setting means; Ratio variable means for varying the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determining means when the specific second determination result is obtained when the second state is set and when the second state is set. It is characterized by having Game machine K2 to.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set when the first state is set by the gaming state setting means and when the second state is set. Since the ratio is varied by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the game is entered in the second entry means in the second state. Even if fraud is done, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when fraud in the second state is performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. A gaming machine K4 having a second flow path in which a game ball can easily enter the second entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the entrance rate of the first entrance means and the second entrance means varies depending on the flow path, so that the game balls flow down. It is possible to change the game by the flow path, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Guiding means for guiding to a variable pitching means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine K5, wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state after being changed to the open state.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to enter the second variable entry means. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic L group> (The probability variation rate is varied by the opening and interval in a configuration other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable entrance means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable entrance means Based on the fact that the second variable entry means arranged in the second variable entry means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable entry means can enter, and that the game ball has passed through the specific area A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the game board surface, lottery of the game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine L1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means, the player is interested in the variable pattern. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and the first entrance means Different second entrance means, first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the game balls entering the first entrance means, and game balls entering the second entrance means Based on the ball, the second discrimination means for performing the second discrimination, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means Display means capable of displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and either one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a predetermined priority order Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the first discrimination result When the first identification information indicating or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and the privilege game executing means When the bonus game is executed, the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states, and the advantageous pattern corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means, The gaming machine L2 is characterized by comprising ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio with the disadvantageous pattern.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in accordance with the gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation for entering the ball can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a first probability that is determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit and a first probability that is higher than the first probability Probability setting means capable of setting either one of two probabilities is provided, and at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means for the privilege given by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine L3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the special game is being executed. By giving interest to whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern cause the second variable ball entry means to change to the open state after the first variable ball entry means changes to the closed state. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the period up to is set to be at least different.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Guiding means for guiding to a variable pitching means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine L5, wherein the second variable pitching means is changed to the closed state after being changed to the open state.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area with a disadvantageous pattern.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of the above, the gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any case, the gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
75a Sorting mechanism (first sorting means)
75b Distribution mechanism (second distribution means)
65 First variable prize winning device (second variable pitching means)
650 Second variable winning device (first variable pitching means)
S1680 Part of privilege grant means S1604 Benefit game execution means

Claims (4)

A condition discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of the specific condition;
Based on the fact that the specific condition is determined to be determined by the condition determining means, a first variable pitching means that is changed from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into an open state in which the game ball can enter;
Second variable ball entry means disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means;
Based on the determination that the specific condition is met, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are each varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is met in the open state. Bonus game execution means for executing bonus games;
First distribution means for distributing at least game balls to the first variable entry means and the downstream side of the first variable entry means;
Game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable entry means by the first assignment means, the second variable entry means,
A gaming machine comprising: a second sorting unit that sorts at least to a downstream side of the second variable pitching unit. The first allocating means and the second allocating means include a rotating part that is rotatable in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising at least a restricting means for restricting a rotation range of the rotating portion by a predetermined angle.   The said 1st distribution means and the said 2nd distribution means are comprised so that it may rotate alternately by the said 1st direction and the said 2nd direction with the game ball which flows down. The gaming machine described. When the first variable pitching means is in a closed state, guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable pitching means;
When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guide means, if the second variable ball entry means is in a closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second distribution means. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine has a guideway to be operated.

Images